JP2015195924A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can alleviate the monotonousness of a game and prevent the decrease of interest.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1A includes a distribution blade 2202 which distributes game balls having entered an introduction port 2201 to a first start port 2001A and a second start port 2001B. A jackpot game state caused by a transition at a momentum when the game ball enters the second start port 2001B has an advantage degree greater than that of a jackpot game state caused by a transition at a momentum when the game ball enters the first start port 2001A. In a first distribution unit 2200, when a plurality of game balls enter the first start port 2001A, it transits from a not-chance state to a chance state. Additionally, when a plurality of game balls enter the second start port 2001B, it transits from the chance state to the not-chance state.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as a pachinko machine, for example, a big hit lottery is performed when a game ball enters a start opening, etc. There is something that shifts to the gaming state (for example, see Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of start ports and performs a lottery to an advantageous game state based on the entrance of game balls into these start ports (see, for example, Patent Document 2). This gaming machine has a distribution member that distributes the game balls that have passed through the introduction flow path to the first branch flow path and the second branch flow path, and the game distributed to the first branch flow path The ball is guided to the first start port, and the game balls distributed to the second branch flow path are guided to the second start port.

JP 2013-6058 A JP2013-231902A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 2, when the game balls pass through the introduction port, the game balls are simply distributed alternately to the first start port or the second start port. . For this reason, the game is monotonous, and the monotony may cause a decrease in interest.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce monotony of a game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention that has solved the above problems is provided with a first flow path for guiding the game medium that has passed through the introduction port provided in the game area to the first passage port, and a second passage port different from the first passage port. A second flow path for guiding is formed, and the game medium is provided with lottery means for performing lottery by passing through the first passage port or the second passage port, and the flow path through which the game medium passed through the introduction port is guided Is a gaming machine comprising switching means for switching to a first guiding state in which the first flow path is set or a second guiding state in which the flow path is set to the second flow path, wherein the lottery means Compared to the lottery by passing, the lottery by passing the game medium at the second passage opening performs a high lottery with a higher degree of advantage at the time of winning. Switching the flow path triggered by passing through the two passage openings And wherein the door.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the lottery means wins the lottery by the passage of the game medium at the second passage port as compared to the lottery by the passage of the game medium at the first passage port (hereinafter referred to as “low lottery”). A lottery with a high degree of time advantage. However, since the low lottery and the high lottery are performed alternately, the game may be monotonous.

  In this regard, the switching means in the gaming machine according to the present invention switches the flow path when a plurality of game media pass through the first passage port or the second passage port. For this reason, when a game medium is introduced into the introduction port, a low lottery is performed until a plurality of game media pass through the first passage port, and then a plurality of game media pass through the second passage port. A high lottery will be held in the meantime. Therefore, for example, a specification in which a high lottery period continues after a low lottery period continues for a certain period can be used. As a result, the monotony of the game can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from below after disassembling each main member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attachment base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit of production | presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of an effect operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right production unit of a plate unit, (b) is a right view of a door lower right production unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from back. It is CC sectional drawing in the door lower right effect unit of FIG.34 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door lower right production | presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit faces forward, and (b) is a front view of a state in which the door lower right rotating body faces rearward. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base in (a), (b) from the back in the state which attached the top dish ball removal unit to the dish unit base FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the top dish ball removal unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper tray ball removal unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray ball removal unit from back. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked down at the game board from back. It is a front view of the game board which abbreviate | omitted illustration of the game ball guide path unit front side. FIG. 51A is an enlarged view of the game ball guiding path unit, and FIG. 51B is a cross-sectional view in the longitudinal direction of the game ball guiding path unit. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the form which the movable accessory is operating. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the other form where the movable accessory is operating. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the further another form where the movable accessory is operating. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the falling movable accessory as seen from the front, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the falling movable accessory as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the falling combination object from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the falling combination object from the back. It is a front view which shows the 1st operation | movement of a fall combination. It is a front view which shows the 2nd operation | movement of a fall movable combination. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the other form where the movable accessory is operating. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 67. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 74 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 73. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 80 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 79. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every kind of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table which can be selected in a normal external disadvantageous game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225a) of the stop symbol in 1st production mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225b) of the stop symbol in 2nd production mode. (A) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (b) is a figure explaining the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (c) is a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating, (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. (A) is a table | surface which shows the jackpot expectation degree etc. when in the 1st production mode according to each production content series, respectively, (b) is a challenge bonus rush expectation degree in the 2nd production mode. It is a table | surface which shows each etc. according to each production content series. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "01H" in the 1st production mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "02H" in the 1st production mode. It is an example of the effect display screen which synchronized the upper plate side liquid crystal display device and the game board side liquid crystal display device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of other modes. (A) is an enlarged front view of a 1st distribution unit, (b) is a bb arrow directional view of (a). It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st distribution unit. It is explanatory drawing explaining a motion of a 1st distribution unit. It is a block diagram of a main control board and a peripheral control board. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the counter value of a starting port counter, and the guidance path guidance state of a distribution blade, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship between the change of the counter value of this, and the change of a guidance path guidance state It is. (A) is a figure which shows the change from a 2nd taxiway guidance state to a 1st taxiway guidance state, (b) is a figure which shows the change from a 1st taxiway guidance state to a 2nd taxiway guidance state. is there. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every kind of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st transmission type liquid crystal control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st distribution blade control process. (A) is a figure which shows the state which displayed the 1st chance image, (b) is a figure which shows the state which displayed the 1st non-chance image. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd transmissive liquid crystal control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd distribution blade control process. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the counter value of a starting port counter, and the guidance path guidance state of a distribution blade, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship between the change of the counter value of this, and the change of a guidance path guidance state It is. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 3rd transmission type liquid crystal control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 3rd sorting blade control process. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the counter value of a starting port counter, and the guidance path guidance state of a distribution blade, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship between the change of the counter value of this, and the change of a guidance path guidance state It is. (A) is a figure which shows the state which displayed the 2nd chance image, (b) is a figure which shows the state which displayed the 2nd non-chance image. A front view of another 1st distribution unit and (b) are front views in the state where the distribution blade in another 1st distribution unit of (a) rotated. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of other modes. It is an enlarged front view of a 2nd distribution unit. It is explanatory drawing explaining a motion of a 2nd distribution unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of other modes. (A) is a principal part disassembled perspective view of a chance display device and a first sorting unit of another mode, and (b) is a figure showing typically each side where a character in a chance contents display member was indicated. . It is explanatory drawing explaining a motion of the chance display apparatus of another aspect, and a 1st distribution unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of other modes. It is a figure explaining the display of a liquid crystal display device, and a motion of a distribution unit. It is a figure explaining the movement of the display of a liquid crystal display device, and the other aspect of a distribution unit. It is a figure explaining the flow of the chance display by a touch panel. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of other modes. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of other modes. (A) is an enlarged front view of a 3rd sorting unit, (b) is a bb arrow directional view of (a). It is a disassembled perspective view of a 3rd distribution unit.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board accommodated in the payout control board box 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout apparatus 830 are guided downward. And an upper full ball path unit 850 that releases the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200, and the payout unit base 801 A game ball which is attached to the lower end and is released from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 is guided forward and released from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank discharge port. Lower full tank path unit having a full tank guide path that guides the played game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the full ball receiving port 530 of the door frame 3. Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 has a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910. Speaker unit 920, a power supply board box 930 which is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and has interface control inside. Interface control board box 940 in which a board is accommodated, and a payout control board box that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and contains a payout control board for controlling the dispensing of game balls. 950.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 for guiding, a flat gaming panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and a rear side of the game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part and opened upward, and a main control board housed inside the main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 A table unit having a board box 1300 and a plurality of winning holes for receiving game balls that are attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and are driven into the game area 5a ( And a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 above the board box 1200 and visible from the player side through the gaming panel 1100. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as seen from the back after being disassembled as the main member.

  The door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 as viewed from the front, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the left front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower right front portion of the door frame base unit 100. And a handle unit 500 attached through the dish unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to a rear cover lower part of the door frame base unit 100, a ball cover unit 540 attached to the lower rear part of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear face of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that closes the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 that covers a lower rear portion of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction with a vertically long rectangle as shown in FIGS. A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500, which is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the front right view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. And the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 as viewed from the front and protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and the glass frame 560 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  As will be described in detail later, the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is arranged in an up-and-down direction and bulges forward, and can store a game ball, and an upper dish 201 and a lower dish 202. And a plate-shaped dish unit base 210 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 that is attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and can display an image. An operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 that can be operated by the player and an upper plate effect button 257, a plate unit cover 260 that covers the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. The door lower right effect unit 270 having the door lower right rotating body 270A that is arranged and rotates according to the gaming state, and the door lower right effect unit 270 are covered from the front side. A transparent production unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removal unit 310 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and a lower portion of the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 A lower dish ball removing unit 320, a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities of the game hall, An upper dish top decoration member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the dish unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the top unit 350 of the door frame 3 includes a unit base 360 that is partially translucent and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 along the upper side. 360, a translucent top decorative member 370 attached to the left and right center on the front surface of 360, and a top speaker that is attached within the top decorative member 370 and outputs a high-frequency sound. And a door frame decorative board 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 410 attached along the left outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown) and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface. And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 includes a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer peripheral edge of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the right side decorative member 470 3 is mounted between the right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown) and a unit base 460 and a right side decoration member 470, and a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And a door frame right decorative board (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is attached to the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100, and is rotatably attached to the handle body 502. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by a player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and supports the handle lever 504 in cooperation with the handle body 502. And. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 is attached to the handle main body 502 and is attached to the handle main body 502 to detect the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor attached to the handle body 502 and detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

  The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and opened on the front side, as shown in FIGS. And a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal ball guide path of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. 526, a full sphere receiving port 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the front sphere passage 526 when viewed from the front, and that can communicate with the full tank guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A foul that opens upward on the right side of the front of the ball receiving port 528 and receives a game ball (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a. The ball receiving port 530 opens to the front in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and releases the game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530 and the dish unit 200. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, etc., the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit body 542 and the box-shaped unit body 542 that extends to the left and right and is open on the rear side. A unit cover 544 detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the foul cover unit 520 in a box shape with the front side opened, and an upper plate of the dish unit 200 opened forward. 201, a ball entrance 546 into which a game ball stored in 201 enters, a ball release port 548 that is capable of releasing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546, and opens backward, and a ball entrance And a ball discharge port 550 that is capable of discharging the game ball that has entered 546 and that opens forward under the ball entrance 546. Although not shown, the ball feed unit 540 includes a ball feed solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. And a switching mechanism that switches between the ball discharge port 548 side and the ball discharge port 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562, as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 that close the inside of the cage unit frame 562.

  The dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear after being decomposed into the main members. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the production operation unit of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from above. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit broken down for each main member and viewed from below. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the rendering operation unit as seen from above with the mounting base unit disassembled, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as seen from below.

  FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit touch unit as seen from above and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as seen from below. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from above with the button unit disassembled, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as seen from below. 31 is a plan view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit in the AA cross section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is the effect operation in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 34 (a) is a front view of the door lower right effect unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the door lower right effect unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in the lower right door production unit of FIG. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary body internal unit as seen from the back. FIG. 42A is a front view of the door lower right effect unit in a state where the door lower right rotating body faces forward, and FIG. 42B is a front view of the door right lower rotating body facing rearward.

  FIG. 43A is a perspective view of the dish unit with the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43B is a perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from back in the state. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper dish ball removal unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 (a) is a perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower dish ball removal unit as seen from the front.

  The dish unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 is an upper tray 201 that stores game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game that is disposed below the upper tray 201 and is supplied from the upper tray 201. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing a sphere. In addition, the dish unit 200 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the front upper part of the dish unit base 210, and the left side of the left and right center bulges greatly forward, and the upper dish 201 And a lower plate body 214 which is attached to the center of the left and right at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 210 and bulges forward to form the lower plate 202. .

  The dish unit 200 covers the production operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper plate body 212 and the front surface of the dish unit base 210, and the front and lower sides of the upper plate body 212, the lower plate body 214, and the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right effect unit 270 disposed on the right side of the dish operation unit 220 and attached to the right front portion of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right effect unit. An effect unit cover 300 that covers the front side of the plate unit base 210 and covers the front side of the plate 270, and a game ball that is mounted so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and is stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212 On the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 214 on the lower side Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Further, the dish unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit 220, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, An upper plate top decorative member 340 that is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and can be decorated with light emission, and is attached to the left side of the front surface of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the plate unit cover 260 so that light can be emitted forward. Plate unit left decorative substrate 345 having a plurality of LEDs, and attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the production unit cover 300 and on the lower side of the door lower right production unit 270. A dish unit right decorative board 346 having a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light, and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 The upper plate decorative board 233, the upper plate decorative board 235, the upper plate liquid crystal board 241, the vibration device 242, the touch panel 246, the production button decoration board 251, the production button press sensor 258, the door lower right relay board 281, which will be described later. The dish unit left decorative board 345 and the dish unit relay board 347 for relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and a peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the dish unit base 210 of the dish unit 200 extends long to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner of the front view and extends back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth under the upper dish ball supply opening 210a. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, a lower tray ball supply port 210c penetrating forward and backward in the lower center of the left and right center when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; There is provided an upper dish ball feed opening 210d that penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the ball supply opening 210c in the front view and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper dish body 212.

  In addition, the dish unit base 210 has a rectangular through-hole 210e that penetrates forward and backward on the left side when viewed from the front of the upper dish ball feed opening 210d, and a receptacle that protrudes forward from the bottom side of the through-hole 210e in a plate shape. The piece 210f, the relief opening 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d, and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 penetrating back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view are inserted. A handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 passes through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front, and a right side when viewed from the front of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c. , And a notch 210j that is notched forward from the rear end.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate body 212 of the dish unit 200 is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. ing. The upper plate body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a that is opened only to the left and rearward on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can be circulated. In the upper plate body 212, the bottom surface is inclined so as to lower the right end as a whole. More specifically, in a state where the upper plate body 212 is attached to the plate unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is a game ball from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 210a from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 210d. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate body 212, and the received game ball is received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed opening 210d.

  The upper plate body 212 includes a metal grounding metal 212b extending from the left and right centers to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (grounded), and the game ball can be contacted to remove static electricity charged in the game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower dish body 214 of the dish unit 200 has a trapezoidal shape in plan view with a long rear end with respect to the front end, and is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear opened. The lower plate body 214 includes a ball hole 214a that penetrates the bottom surface in the vertical direction and can be closed by the lower plate ball hole unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball hole 214a. doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and can store the game balls below the tray unit 200 from the ball release holes 214a. Can be discharged.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the production operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A and the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish body 212 in the center of the left and right when viewed from the front. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the attachment base unit 220A on the left side when viewed from the front of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the attachment base unit 220A. A unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end in front view of the attachment base unit 220A.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire circumference in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side by reducing the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted by the vibrating device 242 that is transmitted to the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A of the production operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and an upper side of the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 which is attached and has a rear end attached to the front end of the upper plate body 212 and can accommodate the touch unit 200B from above, and a horizontally long upper plate attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover that covers the front side of the front lens member 232, the front plate front decorative member 233 that is disposed between the front plate lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and includes a plurality of LEDs on the front surface. And an upper dish decorative member 234 having translucency attached to the H.224.

  Further, the mounting base unit 220A is mounted on the rear end of the unit case 231 and has an upper dish rear decorative board 235 provided with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light upward, and an upper side of the upper dish rear decorative board 235. The upper plate rear decoration member 236 that is disposed on the unit cover 224 and has translucency, and is sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, and from the upper plate rear decoration board 235. A linear light-emitting lens member 237 capable of guiding the light and emitting an upper end linearly, a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side when viewed from the front of the upper dish decoration member 236, and a button attachment member And an upper dish ball removal button 239 that is slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by 238.

  The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined so as to become lower from the front and rear substantially center to the front side, and the mounting base receiving portion 230a that passes through the mounting side receiving portion 230a. One through-hole 230b and a cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through-hole 230b are provided. The through hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. As it goes to the front, it extends at an angle so that it goes forward. Moreover, the cylindrical receiving part 230c is inclined and extended so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are slightly close to the lower ends (tips) with respect to the vertical of the surface of the attachment side receiving part 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes in a cylindrical shape one by one apart from the housing recess 231a that can accommodate the touch unit 220B and the front and rear ends of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a in the front-rear direction. Horizontal support pins 231b, a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward and away from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and from the left and right centers on the front and rear end sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a A central support protrusion 231d that protrudes upward, and two receiving protrusions 231e that protrude in a pyramid shape so as to narrow toward the bottom from the bottom of the housing recess 231a and are spaced apart from each other left and right. .

  Further, the unit case 231 is circularly penetrated up and down on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending from the upper and lower sides to the left and right of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the receiving recess 231a and recessed downward from the upper end are disposed. And a cutout portion 231h.

  The accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 has a shape in plan view that is a combination of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from the left and right sides of the quadrangle. In addition, the receiving recess 231a is formed such that the bottom surface of the quadrangular portion is lower downward than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (axial length) of the damper 222.

  The four lateral support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the lateral support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side on the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The lateral support pin 231 b is formed such that the distance from the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a to the middle of the taper portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length is longer than the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c can be inserted into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion in the housing recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230b of the mounting base 230. The receiving projection 231e has a front outer peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicular to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and is inclined so that the rear outer wall moves forward with respect to the bottom of the housing recess 231a. And extended. In addition, the receiving projection 231e extends so that the outer peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) slightly approach each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. In the assembled state, the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through-hole 230a of the mounting base 231, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The front plate decorative member 234 is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish decoration board 235 includes a plurality of decoration LEDs 235a for decorating the upper dish decoration member 236 and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer on the left and right sides than the upper dish decoration member 236, and the light receiving part 237a and the light receiving part 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish decoration substrate 235. And a flat line-shaped light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the cutout portion 231h of the unit case 231. In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, guide the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b, and the linear light emitting unit 237b. The entire upper end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper dish ball removal button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and includes an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper plate ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 (pull out). )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c, respectively. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the two receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached and the mounting base 230 in which the lower end of the receiving projection 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220B side is applied, the force is not immediately transmitted to the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the concave portion 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends. Therefore, the force can be attenuated to some extent by the bending and transmitted to the mounting base 230.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface that are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (a surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. To do. Thereby, the force from the receiving protrusion 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, and it can be avoided that a large force is applied to the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is hardly damaged. .

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220 </ b> B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 that is open on the upper side, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 that is attached to the lower case 240 from the upper side, A pair of vibration devices 242 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 and the upper side of the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 are attached to the lower case 240 and attached to the upper side. A shallow box-shaped base member 243 having an open portion, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241, and an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the upper surfaces of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 in an assembled state. A sheet-like waterproof seal 248 having a waterproof property is provided which extends over substantially the entire length of the left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247. ing.

  The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the housing recess 213a of the unit case 231 and is formed so as to be housed in the housing recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular board mounting portion 240a extending to the left and right, a flat plate-like protruding portion 240b protruding in a trapezoidal shape from both the left and right sides of the board mounting portion 240a, and an outer diameter of the damper 222. A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c that are vertically opened and partially open to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and project from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. And a vibration device attachment portion 240e to which the vibration device 242 is attached and disposed near the substrate attachment portion 240a between the pair of damper attachment recesses 240c in the protrusion 240b.

  The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at the substantially upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222.

  The vibration device 242 includes a small vibration drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration drive motor 242a with the center of gravity being eccentric. The vibration device 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242b by the vibration drive motor 242a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a in which the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above and formed in a shallow box shape, and an extending portion 243b extending outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. A chamfered taper portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 is such that the distal end side can pass through the tapered portion 231i of the lateral support pin 231b in the unit case 231 and the proximal end side (lower side) from the tapered portion 231i. It is formed in a size that cannot pass.

  The touch panel 246 includes a tempered glass that is strong against impact and is not easily broken, a capacitive sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The touch unit 220B can attach the damper 222 by inserting the damper 222 from the C-shaped open side into the damper mounting recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. Thereby, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. In a state where the damper 222 is mounted in the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Protruding.

  In the touch unit 220 </ b> B, the vibration drive motor 242 a of the pair of vibration devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of vibration devices 242 can independently generate vibrations.

  Further, the touch unit 220 </ b> B can visually recognize an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the dish unit 200, the liquid enters the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged by the ingress of liquid.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the button unit 220 </ b> C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit main body 250 attached to the button unit mounting portion 231 g of the unit case 231 in the mounting base unit 220 </ b> A, and a lower part of the unit main body 250. And a board cover 252 that covers the lower side of the stage button decoration board 251 and is attached to the lower side of the unit main body 250.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached to the upper side. A spring member 254 that is energized, a light guide member 255 that is inserted into the button base 253 and that can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 upward, and a plurality of minute electrodes disposed above the light guide member 255. A sheet-like diffusing lens member 256 having a prism, a translucent upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffusing lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the descending end.

  The unit main body 250 includes three attachment pieces 250a that extend outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and are attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b that extends inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 includes a cylindrical lower tube portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical tube-shaped upper tube portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tube portion 253a, A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b, has a lower end capable of passing through the through-hole 250c of the unit main body 250, protrudes outward from the lower end, and can engage (contact) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. A pair of engaging claw portions 253c and an upper cylindrical portion 253b that protrude radially outwardly from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylinder portion 253b and whose lower ends can come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250 A plurality of flat plate-like contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e that extends outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower tube portion 253a and the upper tube portion 253b in a flat plate shape and is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as illustrated. The spring member 254 has a lower end abutted against the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit main body 250, and an upper end supported by a plurality of abutting pieces 253 d on the button base 253.

  The light guide member 255 extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylinder portion 253a of the button base 253 from the bottom surface of the disk-like main body portion 255a fitted into the upper portion of the upper cylinder portion 253b of the button base 253. A plurality of columnar light guides 255b. The plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusing lens member 256, and the upper plate effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. These button bases 253 and the like are such that the upper surface of the upper plate effect button 257 protrudes upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 are Engagement with the lower surface of 250 restricts further elevation, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the ascending end.

  When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper plate effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further lowering is restricted. Thus, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are in the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220 </ b> C can decorate the upper plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 is a full color LED, and the upper plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the rendering operation unit 220 of the present embodiment has the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper mounting recess 240 c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220 </ b> B in an assembled state from the lower surface of the lower case 240. Since this also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the front end surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom face of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and upward of the touch unit 220B with respect to the horizontal support pins 231b. Movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. Further, the tapered portion 231 i formed on the upper end side of the lateral support pin 231 b and the tapered portion 243 d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243 c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the side of the lateral support pin 231b. Projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240. Further, a gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the left and right lateral support pins 231b.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 220 is constricted downward in the unit case 231 in which the touch unit 220B is attached from above in a pyramid-shaped cylindrical receiving portion 230c constricted downward in the attachment base 230 of the attachment base unit 220A. The lower end of the full pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the housing recess 231a) floating in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, the production operation unit 220 has a linear upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 along the rear side close to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B ( It is exposed in a band shape. The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper dish rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, an upper dish ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the upper dish rear decoration member 236 in front view. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B when viewed from the front.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and can be enjoyed.

  As an image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, an image imitating an operation button is displayed, and by allowing touch detection by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 to be accepted, the image of the image can be displayed to the player. The operation buttons can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of production using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported in a state of being lifted from the unit case 231 by the plurality of dampers 222, and therefore the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the gaming state. Can be vibrated. When the touch panel 246 is produced, the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration device 242 so that the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the finger or hand of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. Even if the operation button of the image is operated to the player, the player can be surprised by illusioning that the actual operation button is operated. It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating by making the player entertain.

  Further, since the production operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the front view of the touch unit 220B, the player can press the upper plate production button 257 according to the gaming state, and the upper plate production button 257 can be operated. You can entertain the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 only have a touch on the touch panel 246, so that the operation feeling is less than that of the actual operation buttons. However, the upper plate effect button 257 is actually pressed. Therefore, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed. .

  Since the production operation unit 220 is arranged at a portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game can be performed even during production using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a possibility that a person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the rendering operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The impact can be absorbed to some extent by force. More specifically, when an impact (load) is applied from above, such as when the touch unit 220B is struck, it is transmitted to the damper 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the damper 222 is lowered while the touch unit 220B is lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 comes into contact with the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and the touch unit 220B is lowered to the front support pin 231c. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B comes into contact with the bottom surfaces of the left and right sides of the housing recess 231a and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. Thereby, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is bent by the load from the center support protrusion 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. By bending the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, the pair of receiving projections 231e projecting downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and from the touch unit 220B. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramid shape that narrows downward, the receiving projection 231e is directed to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (on the mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is distributed and transmitted in a direction along the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, since the structure that absorbs the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the transmission to the mounting base 230 is arranged in layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230 and the like can be made difficult to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the production operation unit 220 has a linear light emitting portion of a linear light emitting lens member 237 that extends along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the post-upper decorative board 235 according to the gaming state. The upper end of 237b can be emitted linearly. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, depending on the gaming state, the decoration LED 235a on the back plate decoration board 235 is used to light-decorate the back plate decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (the rear side from the linear light emitting portion 237b). be able to. By decorating the back plate decoration member 236 with light emission, the player's interest is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B in the same manner as the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. It is possible to entertain the presentation presented by the presentation operation unit 220 and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is attached to an upper plate lower covering portion 262, which will be described later, of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. The waterproof seal 248 is pasted on the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Thereby, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows to the lower side of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). In addition, it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and it is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from generating a malfunction.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 extends in the left and right directions, and the left and right centers bulge forward, and is formed in a shell shape that is open to the rear. . The dish unit cover 260 is opened to the front substantially at the center of the left and right, and a lower dish opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the dish unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) on the inner peripheral wall of the lower dish opening 261. Are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front of the lower plate opening portion 261 and the lower plate opening portion 261 and covers the lower side of the upper plate body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220. A speaker grille 263 that transmits sound from the speakers, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged on the upper side of the speaker grille 263 and is lit and decorated by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and a lower dish opening 261 arranged on the right side of the front view. The handle unit 265 through which the rear part of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes and the bottom surface of the dish unit cover 260 are formed. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  In the lower dish opening 261, the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall is closed by the lower dish body 214. The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are provided in a metal plate.

  The dish unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. Moreover, the right side of the front view is substantially translucent.

  The dish unit cover 260 is formed at an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 so that the dish unit cover 260 can be grasped with one hand. Thus, when the player touches the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be performed. Can be easily performed.

  Specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the upper surface of the front end of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the upper surface of the rear end of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 are The distance from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Accordingly, the player can grasp the space between the upper surface of the touch unit 220 </ b> B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotator 270A for luminescent decoration is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the unit base 271 so as to close the escape opening 210g on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. Door lower right drive motor 272, drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of door lower right drive motor 272, driven gear 274 meshed with drive gear 273 and attached to door lower right rotary body 270A, driven A shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271 and the door lower right bearing member 276. A base side bearing member 277 that rotatably supports the rotating body 270A on the opposite side of the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side when viewed from the front of the door lower right rotating body 270A, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front surface A door lower right base decorative board 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271, A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between a door lower rotary body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) to be described later. .

  The lower right door rotator 270A constitutes the outer shell and is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286, each of which is hemispherical, and between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are formed with semicircular cutout portions 285a and 286a around the rotation axis, respectively. The front outer shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical surface, a band decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction, and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285b. And a heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction on a surface of a hemispherical shell having translucency. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  40 and 41, the rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration board 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower right rotary body decoration board 291. A columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and has a tip attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 are: A cylindrical shape that is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 and has a tip attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277. The second fixed shaft member 293. Although not shown, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 is inserted into the second fixed shaft member 293.

  Further, the rotating body internal unit 290 is disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 and is a flat and annular transparent reflector base 294 attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A morning glory-shaped first reflector 295 which is attached to the reflector base 294 and is open in the axial direction, and is attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring of the first reflector 295. And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat ribs extending radially.

  The rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decorative board 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, and a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296. They are separated from each other for relative rotation.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape from the annular upper portion 271a disposed on the rear side of the door lower right rotating body 270A and the upper right portion of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a obliquely from the upper right portion when viewed from the front. A first projecting piece 271b projecting in the form of a plate, a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a flat plate shape from a portion opposite to the first projecting piece 271b on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a, and a second projecting piece 271c And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape from the front end toward the rear.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft penetrates. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes a mounting portion 275a that is attached to the front end of the first protruding piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the mounting portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can support the tip end of the first fixed shaft member 292 in a non-rotatable manner by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotating body side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second protruding piece 271c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second protruding piece 271c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotator 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c of the lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42A) and a rotational position in which the heart decoration 285c faces rearward (FIG. 42B). Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right effect unit 270 of the present embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward according to the gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the player can be informed of the arrival of a chance and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the door lower right effect unit 270 has the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A mounted non-rotatably, so that the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotated while the door right lower rotating body 270A is rotating. When the lower rotating body decorative board 291 (LED thereof) is caused to emit light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative board 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 Since the direction of light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is illuminated and decorated so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED on the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Or by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be illuminated and decorated in rainbow colors, and the player can be entertained.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the production unit cover 300 of the dish unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotating body cover portion 301 that covers the front side of the spherical lower right door rotation body 270A in the lower right door production unit 270. The decorative unit 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side when viewed from the front of the dish unit cover 260, and penetrates back and forth on the lower right side of the rotating body cover 301. And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The entire production unit cover 300 is translucent in a container shape with the rear opened. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is illuminated and decorated by the lower right door base decorative board 280 of the lower right door effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover section 301 is the dish unit right decorative board 346. Is decorated with luminous.

  43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an opening 311a through which the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239 can be inserted, and a through hole 210e of the dish unit base 210 in the cover 311. A front base member 312 that is attached to a position that is upper left in front view, a pressure transmission member 313 that is rotatably supported by the front base member 312, and that rotates by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 239, and a pressure transmission member A first spring member 314 that urges 313 in the direction in which the upper pan ball removal button 239 rises.

  The upper dish ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 210 so as to close the upper dish ball feeding port 210d of the dish unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member. An upper dish ball removal slider 316 disposed between the plate unit base 315 and the rear base member 315 so as to be movable up and down, and the pressure transmission member 313 is in contact with the upper side from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 that urges the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel with the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311. The front base member 312 and a pair of extensions extending forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. The protruding piece 312b, the shaft support portion 312c recessed in a U-shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a are provided, and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-like spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmission member 313 includes a horizontally long cylindrical shaft portion 313a that is rotatably inserted into a pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rearward extension that extends rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. An upper extension piece 313c that extends upward in the form of a flat plate from the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper dish ball removal button 239. A downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view on the lower surface of the rearward extending piece 313b, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side of the shaft portion 313a near the left end in front view. And a hook-like spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape that extends downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper dish ball removal slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape in parallel with the rear surface of the dish unit base 210, and is provided with a base part 315a attached to the dish unit base 210 and spaced from the left and right at the front surface of the base part 315a. A slider support portion 315b that slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and a front opening at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and allows game balls to circulate.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d that extends downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a continuously with the upper inlet 315c, is opened rearward, and has a lower end curved backward. An L-shaped second guide path 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the one guide path 315d and extends leftward in front view, the left end is opened leftward, and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f closing the rear end side of the portion extending to the left in the guide passage 315e and an L-shaped second guide passage 315e. There is provided an opening 315g that penetrates, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and that locks the upper end of the second spring member 317.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that a portion extending leftward becomes lower as it goes leftward. As shown in FIG. 43B, the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into a notch 210j of a cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210, and the second guide path 315e The lower dish ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

  The upper plate ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate shape, a slider base 316a that is slidably supported by slider support portions 315b of the rear base member 315, and a dish from the left to the front from the center in front view at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b that extends to the upper side of the receiving piece 210f through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the lower end of the lower extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward from the rear side of the base 316a and a hook-like spring mechanism that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and that engages the lower end of the second spring member 317. A stop portion 316d.

  In the upper dish ball removal unit 310, the upper inlet 315 c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right side as viewed from the front of the guide passage part 212 a of the upper dish body 212 in the state where the dish unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be supplied from the upper entrance 315c to the ball feeding unit 540 via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

  Further, when the upper dish ball removal unit 310 presses the upper dish ball removal button 239 downward, the pressing transmission member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extended piece 239a of the upper dish ball removal button 239. Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in the direction of moving downward. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward as the pressing force transmitting member 313 rotates, the upper piece of ball is removed by the transmission piece 316b of the upper dishball removing slider 316 with which the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact. The slider 316 slides downward against the urging force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper plate ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315d side communicates with the second guiding path 315e side. Thereby, the game balls in the upper plate 201 are discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 210c to the lower plate 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first guide path 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second guide path 315e. The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 239 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 316 and the upper dish ball removal button 239 are raised by the urging force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317, It is possible to return to the original state.

  As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower dish ball removing unit 320 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower dish body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the dish unit cover 260, and the ball of the lower dish body 214 is attached. A flat plate-shaped lower dish ball removal base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the hole 214a, and a flat slide lid 322 that can slide left and right on the lower plate ball removal base 321 to close the opening 321a. A knob 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the dish unit cover 260, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in a direction to close the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324 and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 against the biasing force of the spring member 324 in a position where the opening 321a is opened. It is equipped with a.

  The opening 321a of the lower dish ball removal base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower dish ball removal base 321 to the lower dish body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported between the lower dish ball removal base 321 and the lower dish body 212 so as to be slidable to the left and right. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322a that is held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

  The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower dish ball removal base 321 and a pair of holding claws 325b that protrude from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and can hold the holding protrusion 322a. When the holding protrusion 322a is inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the holding device 325 closes the pair of holding claws 325b to hold the holding protrusion 322a and The nail 325b is kept closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding protrusion 322a is released.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 320 has a slide lid 322 between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower dish body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in the front view. Thus, the game balls in the lower plate 202 do not come out downward from the ball release holes 214a, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 202.

  From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower plate 202 passes through the ball removal hole 214a and the opening 321a and can be pulled out below the plate unit 200, and the game ball in the lower plate 202 can be extracted. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even when the operation of the knob 323 is stopped, and the lower plate 202 You can continue to pull out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide lid 322, when the knob 323 is slightly operated to the left side, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, the holding projections 322a are released, and the slide lid 322 slides to the right side by the biasing force of the spring member 324. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. In this manner, by operating the knob 323 of the lower dish ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower dish 202, or the game balls stored in the lower dish 202 can be extracted.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 of the dish unit 200 includes, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, a unit case 331 that is attached to the upper surface in the vicinity of the right end of the rendering operation unit 220 and has translucency, A ball rental button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player; a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the ball rental button 332 and operable by the player; And a display unit 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  When the ball lending operation unit 330 pushes a ball lending button 332 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, the ball lending operation unit 330 receives a predetermined number of game balls. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion and the prepaid card are returned after being drawn. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the left and right center of the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a light-transmitting upper dish top lens. 340a and an upper plate top decorative board 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decoration member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band shape by causing the LED of the upper dish top decoration substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper plate top decoration member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper plate top decoration member is similar to the light emission decoration of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, the linear light emitting lens member 237, and the like. By lighting 340, the player's interest can be attracted to the production operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the production presented by the production operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. be able to.

  The dish unit 200 according to the present embodiment has a game ball in the game area 5a on the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 in accordance with the gaming state that is changed by driving in, a belt-like shape is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish decoration member 236, the upper dish decoration member 340, and the like can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) It is possible to notice light from the outside of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and to attract the player's line of sight (interest) to the linear light emitting lens member 237, that is, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 side. Can. Accordingly, in the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, when presenting an effect such as an image according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, so that the player uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to emit light. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since the dish unit 200 includes the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the gaming state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, the dish unit 200 is disposed outside the gaming area 5a. Since the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is used to indicate the arrival of a chance, a game in the game area 5a and an effect on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a are given to the player. Both can be cared about. Therefore, by making the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (the upper liquid crystal display device 244) care, it is possible to entertain a tight game with a sense of speed and reduce the interest of the player. In addition, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of an opportunity on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, thereby causing the player to make the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 emit light. It is possible to attract attention and to make the player entertained by surely recognizing the arrival of the opportunity. In this case, depending on the player, both the inside and outside of the game area 5a may be concerned, so that the player may not be able to concentrate on both, and the interest may be reduced. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in response to the arrival), the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light, and the game in the game area 5a can be enjoyed. In addition, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, it is possible to entertain the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and to make the game sharp and hard to get tired.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. This makes it easier for the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1 to hide the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and makes it difficult for other players to see the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 next to or behind. An effect presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, while enjoying the effect by the upper liquid crystal display device 244, it is possible to reduce the feeling of being uncomfortable by being looked at by other players and to reduce the interest, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 emits light when presenting the effect by 244, it is difficult to overlook the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light in a band shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous than the case where light is emitted in a dotted manner, and the player Even if the consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the production by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that it falls. Further, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light in a band shape, it becomes a light-emission mode different from light emission of other light-emitting decorative bodies, and can be reduced from being mistaken for light emission of the light-emitting decorative bodies, The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear position close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, Light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can easily enter the player's field of view, and the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed and the production of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed.

  In addition, the production unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 is placed in the game area 5a. Since the player for confirming the amount of game balls to be turned turns the line of sight at a certain frequency, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player directs his / her line of sight to the upper plate 201 at a certain frequency, it is easy to direct his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the upper plate 201 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244). Accordingly, when the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately transferred to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation presented by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the effect operation unit 200 is arranged below the game area 5a and the player is irradiated with light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like from below, the game operation area 5a is arranged above the game area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to get into the eyes, and it is possible to easily notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and the player can be surely paid attention to the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by making the operation unit 200 entertained.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the position of the player's line of sight is any position in the game area 5a. However, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and the production by the production operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that interest falls.

  In addition, since the production operation unit 200 includes the touch panel 246, in addition to the production by the image, the production can be performed by causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by various productions. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to participate in the production, and it is possible to actively entertain the production for the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the game ball in the upper plate 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper dish ball removal button 239 for operating the upper dish ball removal unit 310 is disposed between the guide passage section 212a and the guide passage section 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position that the player cares about even during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be noticed, the player's interest is attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the effect by the touch unit 220B (the effect image by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 The timing of the touch operation, etc.) can be easily noticed.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B including the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper lower plate covering portion 262 of the upper plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. Since the waterproof seal 248 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B, the upper plate 201 touches the outside air on the upper plate body 212 or the surface of the game ball. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the post-upper decoration board 235 for decorating the post-upper decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201. Without being exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, it is possible to prevent problems such as short-circuiting and corrosion in the post-upper decorative substrate 235.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, when the touch unit 220B having the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibration device 242, a plurality of (two) touch units 220B are provided. Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibration device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. Thus, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Accordingly, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates, so that the player can touch the touch panel of the touch unit 220B. The operation feeling of H.246 can be sufficiently provided, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to suppress the interest from being lowered.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the operational feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or the timing of operating the touch panel 246 is suggested. It is possible to entertain the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or a load is applied to the touch unit 220B by hitting or pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it is possible to absorb the impact, etc., it is possible to reduce the damage of the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, etc. due to the impact, etc., and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is operated by the touch unit 220B, the player touches the touch panel 246 for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242 when the 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, since the player can feel that the touch panel 246 is operated by vibrating the player's finger, a sufficient operational feeling can be given, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. Moreover, it is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to deal with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with a variety of performances and to reduce interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B includes the touch panel 246, compared to the conventional push button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and touch Various operations such as holding can be performed. Thereby, more various operation effects can be performed, and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as not to move upward and to move downward. The touch unit 220B is elastically (biased) by a plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during the operation of the touch panel 246, and the operation of the touch panel 246 can be easily performed accurately. Further, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it is possible to make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B that was thought not to move does not vibrate according to the gaming state. The player can be surprised by vibrating with the device 242, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest is reduced.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the part operated by the player on the touch panel 246, it is strong. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is informed that the operation is wrong. It is possible to allow the player to perform a correct operation, and it is possible to entertain an operation effect using the touch panel 246 and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration devices 242 separated from each other are provided, a resonance phenomenon can be generated at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of vibration of each vibration device 242. Can do. Therefore, by controlling each vibration device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Further, when the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed and an impact or a load acts on the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. For this reason, the shock from the upper side or the like can be absorbed (attenuated) to some extent by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B and transmitted to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, an impact or load from the touch unit 220 </ b> B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. Can be widely dispersed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c in which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the attachment side receiving portion 230a of the attachment base 230. Since a gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall and the unit case 231 bends downward due to an impact or load from the touch unit 220B, the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other. Thus, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the impact or the like is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in a state further attenuated by the bending of the unit case 231. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving protruding portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the receiving projection 231e (unit case) 231) The impact, load, etc. from the side are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the impacts and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. The attachment base unit 220A can be prevented from being damaged.

  According to the pachinko machine 1, the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are provided on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 260 of the dish unit 200 bulging forward under the game area 5a. An effect (operation effect) using the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 is presented to the player in accordance with the game state that changes by hitting a ball, and the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257 are displayed to the player during the effect. By operating, the player can be actively involved in the production, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained. And the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper side of the lower dish opening 261 (upper dish lower covering part 262) in the dish unit cover 260 provided with the touch panel 246 are within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by the player's hand. Since the thickness is set, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping the space between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish covering portion 262, so that the touch panel 246 is accurately operated. be able to.

  Specifically, since the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is a thickness within a range of 15 mm to 50 mm that can be grasped by hand, for example, fingers excluding the thumb When the thumb is positioned on the upper side of the touch panel 246 in a state where it is in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the range of movement of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb. Is possible. In this state, since the fingers excluding the thumb are in contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, it is possible to stabilize the thumb, and a desired position of the touch panel 246 can be touched by the thumb or on the touch panel 246. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved, and the touch panel 246 can be accurately operated. Further, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated with other fingers, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Accordingly, since the touch panel 246 is easy to operate, the touch panel 246 can be easily and accurately operated during the production using the touch panel 246, and the player can be entertained by the production by the operation of the touch panel 246. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm from the front end of the dish unit cover 260 to the rear, and is operated when the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 are gripped from the front end side and the touch panel 246 is operated. Since the touch panel 246 is arranged within the reach of the finger to be touched, the touch panel 246 can be operated with the finger stabilized, and the entertainment using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Furthermore, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is inclined so as to increase from the front side toward the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side so that the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the player operates the touch panel 246. It is possible to improve the properties, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side. Therefore, the dish unit 200 increases toward the rear side. Strength and rigidity of the Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is hit from the upper side or strongly pressed, the touch panel 246, the dish unit cover 260, and the like can be made difficult to break, and the game is interrupted by the game being interrupted due to breakage of the touch panel 246 or the like. Can be reduced.

  Further, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 that is visible from the upper side through the touch panel 246 is provided, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 to operate the touch panel 246. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can operate the touch panel 246 according to the content of the displayed image without knowing the operation method of the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved.

  In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, by displaying the effect image according to the game state, the player can be entertained by the effect image in addition to the operation effect of the touch panel 246. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since the touch panel 246 is arranged in the center of the left and right, the touch panel 246 is easy to see and the distance is the same from both sides of the player's left and right hands, and the touch panel 246 is operated with the hand that is easy for the player to use. The operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved by operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand. Therefore, when an effect using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be immediately recognized and operated, and it is possible to quickly respond to the operation effect, thereby suppressing the entertaining of the player and reducing the interest. can do.

  In addition, an upper plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player is provided, and in an operation effect presented according to the game state, in addition to a touch operation by the touch panel 246, a press operation by the upper plate effect button 257 is performed. Therefore, various operation effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest in the game.

  Further, since a part (guide passage portion 212a) of the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) for storing game balls along the rear side of the touch panel 246 is opened upward, for example, the guide passage of the upper plate 201 The finger except the thumb is locked to the portion 212a and the touch panel 246 is operated with the thumb, so that the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked to the guide passage portion 212a, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved. In addition, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved, and the touch panel 246 is operated by grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 or by locking a finger to the guide passage portion 212a. Since the finger can be stabilized and the operability can be improved, it is possible to select how to place the hand to stabilize the finger according to the player's habit and preference, and more diverse players It becomes possible corresponding, it may be easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine for a game.

  Subsequently, a configuration example of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. 47 is a front view of the game board 5, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 has an outer rail 6002 and an inner rail 6003, and a frame-shaped front component member 6001 that defines an outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are driven, and a front component member A gaming panel 1100 arranged to close the gaming area 5a on the rear side of 6001, a function display unit 6040 arranged on the lower side of the front structural member 6001 on the left side of the out port 6006 outside the gaming area 5a, An attacker unit 2000 disposed on the right side in the left and right direction in the area 5a and above the out port 6006 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and disposed on the right area in the game area 5a and on the front surface of the game panel 1100. And a game ball guiding path unit 6010 supported by the game panel 5100 and a game panel 1100 disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 5a. The frame-shaped center accessory 2300 to be played, the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped decorative body) 2300 are passed through the rear side of the back unit 3000. It mainly includes a liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means that is attached so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image.

  The attacker unit 2000 is inserted into the opening formed in the lower right portion of the gaming panel 1100 from the front side and then fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of receiving ports through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a can be received. Specifically, a first start port 2001 that is arranged at substantially the center in the left-right direction and obtains a special lottery result, and a rectangular large winning opening 2003 that is arranged on the right side of the first start port 2001 and extends greatly in the left-right direction. And a general winning port 2004 arranged on the left side of the big winning port 2003 and the right side of the first starting port 2001, and a central left general winning port 2004A and a central right respectively arranged slightly below the left and right of the first starting port 2001. A general winning port 2004B and a second start port unit 2005 including a second start port from which a special lottery result is obtained in the same manner as the first start port are provided. The second start port unit 2005 exists almost directly above the grand prize winning port 2003.

  The second start opening unit 2005 has a normal gate 2005a from which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn in response to the passing of the game ball, a second start opening 2005c, and a second start opening according to the normal lottery result of the normal gate. A movable piece 2005b that opens and closes, and a game ball discharge route 2005d that discharges the game ball 2006a that cannot pass to the second start opening 2005c after passing through the normal gate 2005a and is closed to the second winning opening 2005c. The game ball guide route 2005e that can guide the game ball to the second start opening 2005c by opening the movable piece 2005b after passing through the gate 2005a is integrated. The start end of the second starter unit 2005 communicates with the end of the above-described game ball guiding path unit 6010. When the game ball is hit to the right and enters the game ball guiding path unit 6010, the inside of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 Falls to the second starter unit 2005. Next, the game ball passes through the gate 2005a of the second starter unit as it is to reach the movable piece 2005b, and when the movable piece 2005b is open, it passes through the game ball guide route 2005e to the second starter port 2005c. On the other hand, when the movable piece 2005b is closed, it passes through the game ball discharge route 2005c and falls toward the big winning opening 2003. The movable piece 2005b is opened and closed by a solenoid.

  The first starting port 2001, the general winning port 2004, and the central general winning ports 2004A, 2004B are open on the upper side, and game balls can be received at all times. Further, a decorative plate 2007 is provided at a position before the first starting port 2001 and the central general winning ports 2004A and 2004B. The decorative plate 2007 includes a substantially semicircular central portion disposed at a position before the first start port 2001, a left extending portion 2007A extending leftward from the central portion, and a rightward extending from the central portion. A right extending portion 2007B that extends and a downward extending portion 2007C that extends downward from the central portion are provided. Among these, the left extension material 2007A extends to a position before the central left general winning opening 2007A, and the right extension portion 2007B extends to a position before the central left general winning opening 2007B. . Further, the downwardly extending portion 2007C extends to a position that covers a part of the out port 6006. The decorative plate 2007 is formed of a plate material having a uniform thickness. On the back side of the downwardly extending portion 2007C, a space about the thickness of the central general prize opening 2007A, 2007B is formed. Therefore, the game ball can pass through the back side of the downwardly extending portion 2007C of the decorative plate 2007, and the game ball can be received into the out port 6006 that has passed through the back side of the downwardly extending portion 2007C. Yes.

  The downward extending portion 2007C of the decorative plate 2007 extends to a position that covers a part of the out port 6006 disposed at the lower end of the game area 5a. Since a space through which a game ball can pass is formed on the back side of the downwardly extending portion 2007C of the decorative plate 2007, it is launched into the game area 5a and enters the introduction port 2201, the general winning port 2004, or the like. A game ball that has reached the lower end of the game area 5a without being received is received in the out port 6006.

  A part of the game balls launched into the game area 5a wins the start opening 2001, the general winning opening 2004, and the like. On the other hand, the other game balls reach the lowermost end of the game area 5a and are received by the out port 6006. For this reason, many game balls are received in the out port 6006.

  Here, if a magnetic body is arranged in the vicinity of the out port 6006, the game balls are attracted and moved by the magnetic force of the magnetic body, or a lot of game balls are retained around the out port 6006 to form a so-called “grape”. For example, it may be possible to illegally pay out game balls. For this reason, for example, a person who intends to act fraudulently may arrange a magnetic body around the out port 6006 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 so as to perform unauthorized payout.

  In this respect, since the downward extending portion 2007C of the decorative plate 2007 extends to a position that covers a part of the out port 6006, when viewed from the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the decorative plate 2007 is located on the front side of the out port 6006. The downward extending portion 2007C in FIG. For this reason, even if a magnetic body is disposed outside the out port 6006, the magnetic force of the magnetic body in the vicinity of the out port 6006 is weakened or erased by the downward extending portion 2007C in the decorative plate 2007. Therefore, when a magnetic body is arranged outside the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to suppress the adsorption of the game ball by the magnetic body, and it is possible to suppress illegal payout of the game ball.

  In addition, a downwardly extending portion 2007 </ b> C of the decorative plate 2007 attached to the start port 2001 disposed around the out port 6006 is used. For this reason, the member arrange | positioned in the vicinity of the out port 6006 can contribute to fraud suppression around the out port 6006 using a magnetic body. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a shielding member that blocks special magnetism separately and fraud can be suppressed, an increase in the number of parts for fraud suppression can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the surface of the decorative plate 2007 is decorated, and is apparently a decorative member. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who intends to commit fraud to understand that there is an effect of fraud suppression. In the above example, the downward extending portion 2007C of the decorative plate 2007 is extended to a position before the out port 6006, but other members may be extended to a position covering a part of the out port 6006. it can.

  Furthermore, although the downward extension part 2007C in the decorative plate 2007 is made of, for example, plastic, it can be made of other materials. Furthermore, a magnetic shield can be formed on the downwardly extending portion 2007C of the decorative plate 2007. By forming a magnetic shield in the downwardly extending portion 2007C of the decorative plate 2007, it is possible to further enhance the effect of fraud suppression by the magnetic material.

  The special winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported so that the lower side is pivotable. In a substantially vertical state, the prize winning port 2003 is closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and when the upper side is pivoted so as to tilt forward, The big prize opening 2003 is opened so that game balls can be received. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big winning opening 2003 is closed in a normal gaming state, and is performed by receiving a game ball (starting winning) at the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c. Depending on the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), the actuator is opened and closed. However, as will be described later, when the result of the special lottery is “big hit (special hit)”, the opening / closing member 2006 according to this embodiment accepts the game ball to the effective gate (described later) after the condition device is activated. It is possible to open and close by driving the attacker solenoid on the condition that there is. The effective gate is a special gate for enabling the continuous object operating device after the condition device is operated. The effective gate is prepared so that the pachinko machine 1 has a function capable of delaying the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device operates when the jackpot is won.

  Next, details of the game ball guiding path unit 6000 will be described. The game ball guiding path unit 6000 is made of a resin part product formed in the form of a hollow tube, and is attached to the game panel 1100 up and down on the right side of the game area 5a as described above. FIG. 50 shows the internal structure of the hollow tube with the illustration of the front side portion of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 omitted. 51A is an enlarged view of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 in FIG. 50, and FIG. 51B is a cross-sectional view in the longitudinal direction of the game ball guiding path unit 6010.

  The start end 6010a of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 is configured to be opened at the almost uppermost position on the right side of the game area. All of the balls are supplied into the game ball guiding path unit 6010 from the open end 6010a. A first half region having a predetermined width following the start end 6010a of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 is formed of a straight portion 6010c that is substantially perpendicular and a bent portion 6010d that is bent subsequently. An effect gate 6011 is formed at the end of the straight part 6010c and at the start of the bent part 6010d. When the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, the passing information of the game ball is supplied to the peripheral control board (or the main control board), and the peripheral control board triggers the right hand of the game ball when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011. The predetermined effect information of the effect device including the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed in the gaming state to be enabled. The game ball that has passed the effect gate 6011 is guided to the straight portion 6010e after passing through the bending portion 6010d while reciprocating in the left-right direction. The bending portion 6010c reduces the falling speed of the game ball by bending the progress of the game ball.

  A straight portion 6010e following the bent portion 6010c of the game ball guiding path unit is formed in a straight line having a relatively long width and descending substantially vertically. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the front side 6010f of the game ball guiding path unit in the straight part 6010e is provided with a plurality of convex bodies 6010h having a semispherical cross section that protrude toward the rear side 6010g. Also, a convex body 6010h that protrudes from the rear surface portion toward the front surface portion is provided. Since the convex body on the front side 6010f and the convex body on the rear side 6010g are formed in a staggered pattern, the gaming machine balls 6010i flowing down in the straight portion 6010e have a plurality of convex bodies arranged in a staggered pattern. Since the game balls are in contact with each other in order and bend while moving forward and backward, the falling speed of the game ball is reduced. The height in the front-rear direction of the convex body 6010h is set in a range that does not impair the progress of the game ball passing through the game ball guiding path unit. In order to adjust the falling speed of the game balls, the width in the direction of travel of the game balls of some of the convex bodies may be increased as indicated by reference numeral 6010j. In order to avoid a human head-type movable accessory, the straight portion 6010e is formed in a straight shape without being bent like the bent portion 6010d.

  A bulging portion 6010k following the straight portion 6010e is formed in a lower region of the game region of the game ball guiding path unit 6010. An inner tube 6010m is formed in the bulging portion 6010k, and the inner tube 6010m communicates with the second starter port unit 2000 described above. The above-mentioned effective gate 6010n is provided at the starting end of the internal tube 6010m, and the game ball that advances while falling in the straight portion 6010e is directed to the internal tube 6010m as it is and passes through the effective gate 6010n, and then the second start. The mouth unit 2000 is reached. The falling speed of the game ball passing through the game ball guiding path unit 6000 is reduced particularly in the process of passing through the bent portion 6010d and the straight portion 6010e. Therefore, it is possible to gain time until the game ball passes through the effect gate 6010n after passing through the effect gate 6011 as compared to the case where the game ball falls freely without its speed being reduced. Therefore, since the peripheral control board can have a margin for the time required for the production in the liquid crystal display device or the like, an effective production can be provided to the player. Details of this will be described later. The normal gate 2005a, the effect gate 6011, and the effective gate 6010n are provided with a gate switch (gate sensor) that detects the passage of the game ball.

  The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1100, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100. FIG. As shown in the figure, it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 52, a logo movable accessory 6200 simulating a logo is provided on the upper portion of the center accessory 2300 so as to be able to reciprocally tilt counterclockwise from the right side toward the center of the game board in front view. Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a zombie movable accessory 6201 imitating the head of a person (zombie) is placed in a straight line from the right side of the game panel 1100 toward the center on the right side of the center accessory 2300. As shown in FIG. 53, a rectangular movable accessory 6202 is provided on the left side of the center accessory so as to be able to reciprocate clockwise around the lower side. The peripheral control board controls the movable mode of the movable accessory according to the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and mainly the back box 3001 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 1100 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In a back box 3001, a shutter-type movable accessory described later disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a drop movable accessory (described later) simulating a claw capable of dropping in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided. It is prepared for. A board substrate holder 6023 is fixed below the back box 3001. The board substrate holder 6023 is provided with a main control board box 6024 for housing a main control board for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof. Further, a peripheral board box 6022 for storing a peripheral control board is attached to the back surface of the back box 3001.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the shutter-type movable accessory 6301 includes an upper shutter body 6302 and a lower shutter body 6303. The upper shutter body 6302 is supported by the back box 3001 so that it can be moved back and forth between the back of the upper part of the center accessory 2300 and the center of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400 at the front surface of the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400, and the lower shutter body 6303 is supported by the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400. Is supported in such a manner that it can be moved back and forth between the back side of the lower part of the center accessory and the central part of the liquid crystal display device. The peripheral control board moves the upper shutter body 6020 and the lower shutter body 6303 separately or simultaneously according to the gaming state, and the upper shutter body 6202 and the lower shutter body 6303 are combined on the front surface of the image 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The integrated shutter body is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the drop movable accessory 6250 suddenly drops a relatively large width from the non-opening region on the top of the game panel 1100 to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, the gaming machine displays the player's attention and viewpoint on the liquid crystal display on the gaming panel 1100 side (game area 5a side) when the player's attention is directed to the above-described upper liquid crystal display device 244 (touch panel 246). Can be directed to the device. Next, the details of the drop movable accessory 6250 will be described. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the falling movable object as viewed from the front, FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the falling object as viewed from the back, and FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view of the falling combination as viewed from the front. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the falling combination as seen from the back, FIG. 58 is a front view showing a first operation of the falling combination, and FIG. 59 is a second view of the falling movable combination. It is a front view which shows operation | movement.

  The falling movable accessory includes a falling body 6250a imitating a claw, an arm body 6250b that supports the falling body, and a folder 6250c that supports the base 6251 of the arm body 6250b and controls the falling behavior of the falling body 6250a. Configured. The folder 6250c is fixed to the back box 3001 so as to be behind the center accessory 2300 on the right side of the game area 5a.

  The folder 6250c is configured such that the drive mechanism 6250f of the arm body 6250b is accommodated by the front cover 6250d and the rear cover 6253e. The drive mechanism 6250f includes a cam 6251f that contacts the bottom surface 6250e of the taper portion of the base 6251, a first motor 6250g that rotationally drives the cam 6251f, a first rail 6250h that guides the vertical movement of the base 6251, and The second rail 6250i, the rack 6250j that moves up and down along the second rail 6250i, the pinion 6250k that meshes with the rack 6250j and moves the rack 6250j up and down, and the second motor 6250m that rotationally drives the pinion And. The first rail 6250h is formed to be approximately half the height of the folder 6250c, and the lower end of the first rail 6250h is fitted into and supported by a rib 6250r on the inner surface of the rear cover 6253e. When the falling body 6250a descends, the lower end of the base 6251 abuts against the rib 6250r, so that the lowest descending position of the falling body 6250a is regulated at substantially the center of the folder.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the cam 6251f is in contact with the tapered portion 6250e of the base 6251 and the tapered portion 6250e is supported by the maximum diameter of the cam 6251f (FIG. 58 (a)), the falling body 6250a is It is supported at its uppermost position. When the cam 6251f reciprocates in the clockwise direction within a small angle range by the first motor 6250g, the contact position between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface of the tapered portion 6250e slightly moves up and down as shown in FIG. Along with this, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line, the falling body 6250a also moves up and down so as to be slightly exposed from the upper end position of the center accessory 2300. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the cam 6251f is increased and the engagement state between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface 6250e of the tapered portion is finally released, the dropping body 6250a freely falls and the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the back side 2300 of the center accessory. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), FIG.

  From this state, when the second motor 6250m rotates the pinion 6250k to raise the rack 6250j (FIG. 59 (b)), the falling body 6250a also rises as if pushed by the rack 6250j. After the falling body 6250a is raised to the uppermost position, the first motor 6250g rotates until the cam 6251f contacts the tapered bottom surface 6250e, whereby the falling body 6250a is supported by the cam 6251f and returns to the uppermost position. Next, the second motor 6250m rotates the pinion 6250k in the reverse direction to lower the rack 6250j to the lowermost position. Unlike the first rail 6250h, the second rail 6250i has a length substantially equal to the vertical length of the folder 6250c in order to guide the vertical movement of the rack. The position of the cam 6251 and the position of the rack 6250j are detected by the photosensors 6250p and 6250q, and the peripheral control board is rotated by the rotation positions of the first motor 6250g and the second motor 6250m according to the output from the photosensor. To control.

  Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 61, and FIG. 63 is the payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays an electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61, and FIG. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 66 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on. Various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are input to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor, and detection signals from various detection switches. A main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids such as a movable accessory, etc. And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or instantaneous power failure.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A start port switch 3022 (generically referring to the first start port switch and the second start port switch) that detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2005c, respectively, and a general winning port In 2004, a detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball that has entered the central general winning opening 2004A, 2004B and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are predetermined by the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. Is input to the input port of the input port. Also, a gate switch 2352 that detects game balls that have passed through the normal gate 2005a and the effective gate 6010n (each switch is generically referred to), a count switch 2110 that detects game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2003, and The detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024, which is attached to the back unit 3000 and detects a fraud using a magnet, is transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU 4100a.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and sends a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid (movable piece 2005b drive solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the panel relay terminal plate 4161 and the function display board 119 are output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. A first special symbol display 1185, a second special symbol display 1186, a first special symbol storage display 1184, a second special symbol storage display 1187, a normal symbol display 1189, a normal symbol storage display 1188, A drive signal is output to the game status indicator 1183 and the round indicator 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In this embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the start opening switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110, whereas the general winning opening switch 3020 is used. The contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2005c, and the gate also passes frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 is also frequent. Occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the winning ball 2003 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switch 3020 does not occur frequently at the general winning opening 2004 and the central general winning openings 2004A and 2004B where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening switch 3020.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the predetermined serial input port. Receives various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Thus, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, is connected to the bus 4100ah. Circuit connection (see FIG. 71). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 71). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 67). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110 (to be described later) is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. has a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 860a that also functions in various ways, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying. Further, the operation switch 860a having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a based on a detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling operations, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU4120a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 4120b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744, CR CR unit input / output circuit for exchanging various signals with unit 6 Is provided with a 4120e, a. The payout control MPU 4120a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program converts various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control I / O port 4120b. Receive serial data by serial method. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4120b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 860a, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  In addition, when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command). In both cases, when a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later, and the information Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function does not reset the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  A detection signal from a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply path of the prize ball device and a count switch 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball path of the prize ball device is firstly a prize ball device. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout case inner substrate and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device are first the rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device, the substrate in the prize ball case, and the payout control input. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the circuit 4120b.

  The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame relative to the main body frame and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame relative to the outer frame is a payout control via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the MPU 4120a.

  The detection signal from the full switch 550 is first input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 192, the power supply board 851, and the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b in the serial data mode at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 860a. Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the main control board 4100.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a sends out various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port as serial data to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, thereby giving out the payout without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function outputs the drive signal. A drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor via the base plate in the prize ball case, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the pachinko gaming machine 1 By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, a drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b. To do.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). The fact that there is an abnormality in electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 4110) is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is clear” (specifically, Is based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and the payout rotator is difficult to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “counter switch error” (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the count switch 751 based on a detection signal from the count switch 751) is notified, and the number “ When “5” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is “full” (specifically, the game ball stored is full based on the detection signal from the full-tan switch 550), and the number “7” is displayed. When the number is “CR not connected”, the fact that the electrical connection is cut off from any part of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6 is notified, and when the number “9” is displayed In stock (with prize balls stock (unpaid coin)) "in the effect that (specifically, yet that the ball number of game balls not payout has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to an external terminal board via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of game balls, etc. and various information (game information, error contents related to payout operation of game balls or the fact that there was an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in. The external terminal board and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to cause the hall computer to Does not malfunction or break down, and there is an abnormality in the main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout etc. Therefore, a malfunction or failure may occur due to application of various voltages. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending apparatus connection terminal board such as a game ball. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the input / output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c, such as a game sphere. The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 67) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 4120a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 4120a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function.

  Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 63, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of CR unit 6 and gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and payout control board 4110, gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are supplied to the frequency display plate 365. .

  A switch 365a and a return switch 365b are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and a remaining frequency display 365c which is a segment display is mounted.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (the ball lending switch 365a is turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 365b is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three digit segment indicators, one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicator, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are connected from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball and the main door relay terminal board When input via the 880, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button is pressed and a ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return switch 365 b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

  Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit that performs launch control by the launch solenoid of the hitting ball launcher and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid.

  The power control unit 855 operates the power switch 852 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. Power factor correction circuit 855b, smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improvement circuit 855b, and various direct currents for supplying power smoothed by smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates A power generation circuit 855d for generating a power supply.

  A launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid and ball feed control by ball feed mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a. The launch control circuit 857a detects an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a touch switch 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching. And a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launching (launching) of the game ball is forcibly stopped at the will of the player, via the handle relay terminal plate 192, Have been entered. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 857a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 4110. .

  The launch control circuit 857 a performs control to adjust a drive current for launching (launching) a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 and outputting the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 654.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. While performing drawing control and detecting control of the touch state of the touch panel 246, a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and a liquid crystal for controlling sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker provided in the door frame, and A sound control unit 4160, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time, and time information that specifies hour, minute, and second, and a body frame are provided. Rotate the knob to adjust the volume of music and sound effects that flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box and the speakers provided on the door frame. And a, and volume adjustment volume adjusted by.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data; Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have. In addition, the peripheral control unit 4150 controls the effect operation in response to the game ball passing information by the switch of the effect gate 6011 and the input information of the operation of the effect operation means such as the effect button 257.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with a backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board. The stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for transmitting various kinds of movable bodies provided in the game board 4 to the drive board 4170 is serialized for the motor drive board. Electric drive from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or an electric drive such as a dial drive motor provided on the door frame Door side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board, and peripheral door relay terminal board The door side emission data for transmitting to the drive amplifier board or outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame is used for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted from the serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit provided in the operation unit 400, and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board. Then, it is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies (movable accessories) provided on the game board 5, and further, a gate switch of the effect gate 6011 The detection signal from the switch and the detection signal from the push switch such as a production button are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 and the like, and the serialized detection data is serialized on the game board side. The signal is input from the transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial Is. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa without using the DMA0 ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 The lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume, and is divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion. The pressed voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame are provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 3. Music and sound effects are played from the speakers. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game effects, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1400 is rendered more powerful, or is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without being controlled, and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) by a program for the volume from mute to maximum So that the it can be adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume to a low level, it is provided on the speaker and door frame accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 is reduced, the sound volume is high when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating. The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data for defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the luminance When the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When 12 months have already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to light up.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce for storing the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing the information not updated for backup among the various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on command from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and the respective state effects. (For example, instructing the start of production when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 61 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) is cleared to zero. The

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the camera can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are appended respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1 ms)” will be described later. As described above, each time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, so that “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are added respectively. (Effect information (1 ms) and later-described effect backup information (1 ms) are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the lighting data, flashing signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC 41654a described later). Various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It has been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in a storage area, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided with various kinds of signals provided on the game board based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained from the original position and the movable position of the movable body are set. Is various information (for example, various detections provided in the operation unit) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit and the operation of the pressing operation unit based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit. Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit created based on the detection signal from the switch, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set in the storage area.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the Bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

  A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is that the power-on command from the main control board 4100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including power recovery due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (For example, instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 61 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) However, it is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

  Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. As shown in FIG. 64, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 performs a built-in sound source for sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and a game board side liquid crystal. Sound display built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a for controlling drawing of the display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the screens displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data, and serialized sound An audio data transmission IC 4160c that transmits music, sound effects, and the like as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194; The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 3 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b also stores suggestion display object image data used to display an suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit (operation unit) of the operation unit.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to the VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  When the screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the inputted screen data as shown in FIG. Sprite data is extracted by extracting the side character data and the upper plate side character data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from the channel CH1 and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are synchronized. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a detection signal corresponding to the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246, and when the detection signal is received, outputs it to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, so that the effect control program can output the contact surface of the touch panel 246. The contact state can be grasped. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the upper plate side The image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 is moved up from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 244. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. This is the data to generate above.

  The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set and the music accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 Incorporates a sub-volume value that adjusts. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode to be described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound to obtain audio as audio data. The data is output to the data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined performance sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the master volume value, so that it is accommodated in the speaker box provided on the main body frame. The volume that flows from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame is set to an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set sound adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually stored in the speaker box provided in the main body frame. Amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame, serializes the amplified effect sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and is used for the notification sound. Sub that adjusts the sound data of the notification sound built into the track and the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used The volume of the notification sound thus synthesized is actually applied to the main body frame by synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the volume value. Amplification is performed up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the provided speaker box and the speaker provided in the door frame, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 A brief explanation of the control for playing the notification sound to notify the store clerk, etc. is as follows. First, the subvolume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound of the track in which this production sound is incorporated is set. The data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value where the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this synthesized production sound The volume of the sound volume and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume that flows from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speakers provided in the door frame. Amplified to over volume value, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound in the audio data transmission IC4160c as audio data serialization.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. At this time, since the production sound is muted, although the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the production sound proceeds in accordance with the above-described sound generation schedule data. doing. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when this predetermined period has elapsed, The volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. Is set (at this time, if it is adjusted by moving to the setting mode by operating the dial operation part or the press operation part of the operation unit, it is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound), It flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 is caused. When the notification sound flows to notify the hall clerk etc., the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame, Since the silenced production sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame after a predetermined period of time has passed. When it disappears, the production sound does not start again from where the notification sound began to flow, but rather until the point in time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period of time elapses. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for growth.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used for drawing on the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the game board side character data for drawing on the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

  When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speakers provided on the door frame.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data on the left and right sides, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the minus signal is affected by noise, the noise component on the plus signal and the noise component on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board into one left audio data. Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured with the RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a Christmas tree or reindeer screen is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, or the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED luminance setting information when an LED type backlight is mounted on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to control the backlight ON / OFF or only ON when the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 are performed. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is mounted with an LED type, etc. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with a low probability or a high probability).

  In addition, the luminance setting information stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. In addition to displaying a screen for performing the setting mode on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 when operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, If the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is being demonstrated, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal. It is displayed on the display device 1400. By operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and the time information are reset, or the backlight luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is set to a desired luminance. Can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1400 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired for the above, to 80%. And when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 has been powered on for the first time, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of the control unit power-on process, and the time Current time information set in the information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

  As described above, the volume adjustment volume adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by rotating the knob portion. Can be done. As described above, the volume adjustment volume is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak can rotate the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music is received from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. And sound effects.

  As described above, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announces contents related to game effects (for example, an announcement that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 will be rendered more powerful, or that it is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player) The notification sound for the sound is also sent from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame, but the notification sound and notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the sound level, and controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) by the program from the mute level to the maximum volume level. Thereby making it possible to adjust it.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thereby, for example, even if a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the loud sound (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state is entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume, the dial operation section and the press operation section of the operation unit are adjusted. By operating, you can switch to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. In addition to displaying a screen for performing the setting mode on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 when operating the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, If the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the waiting state and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is being demonstrated, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal. It is displayed on the display device 1400. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit and the press operation unit of the operation unit according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150akZ converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume from an analog value to a digital value, The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit or the pressing operation unit of the operation unit. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume, and the operation of the dial operation unit or the press operation unit of the operation unit is performed. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to increase or decrease the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame must be opened from the outer frame. As a result, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume control volume. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 in a waiting state. When the dial operation part or the press operation part of the operation unit is operated within a certain period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the operation is performed according to the screen of the setting mode. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation section and the press operation section of the unit. This allows the player to adjust the volume of music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, the operation unit dial You can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the operation unit or the press operation unit, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk loud and feel noisy music or sound effects, The pressing operation unit can be operated to reduce the sound volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a state in which no game is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, and when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is repeatedly demonstrated (for example, 10 times). ) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by feeling the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation part and the pressing operation part of the operation unit, and has been sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game will now have the dial operation unit and the press operation unit of the operation unit. To reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Next, a power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

  The power board is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the power supply board includes a power supply control unit 855 and a launch control unit 857. The power supply control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The unit is a circuit for driving and controlling the launch solenoid and the ball feed unit ball feed solenoid of the ball hitting device.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 and to the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 volt (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 855b. This power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 857a and the power generation circuit 855d of the launch control unit 857, respectively.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. Backup power is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 launches a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle body using + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power supply. While controlling the drive current for (launching) and outputting it to the firing solenoid, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit is controlled by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid of the ball feeding unit. One game ball stored in the ball is received, and the game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the ball hitting device.

  The power generation circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied with the + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as will be described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control filter circuit 4100h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and the payout control. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the substrate 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, +5 V created by the power supply creation circuit on the power supply board flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 A current flows toward the direction. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is supplied with + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board returns to the payout control board 4110 and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. Can be recharged. Thereby, when + 5V created by the power generation circuit is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as payout VBB. The power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a does not flow because the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate. However, the memory contents are held by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It is like that.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110. In addition to being connected, it is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode MD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. Be able to. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit of the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V. In this case, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the diode MD0 is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. However, the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is hindered by this, but the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

  Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 67, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply substrate are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V. Two kinds of voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral control board 4140 and Each is supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), three types of voltages supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180 are used. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a panel motor or solenoid.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 4140b that generates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board. Yes. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal module 470a of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 246, respectively. . Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power source 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the backlight power source 470b of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, respectively.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards and the like of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). Circuit. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. . Note that +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the main control board 4100 includes a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, a power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and the + 5V of the main control board 4100 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. The power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  Next, the circuit of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 70 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 71 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 67 will be described, and then the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 4100 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V generation circuit 4100g, and In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 69, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz) )) Mainly.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. As a result, as described above, + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and + 5V is generated. When the circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 69, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic is LOW. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The attached main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 69, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a clock signal of 24 MHz is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is provided with the payout shown in FIG. 62 in addition to the detection signals from the general prize opening switch 3020, the start opening switch 3022, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. This is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch provided on the control board 4110 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input will be described.

  First, as described above, the operation switch includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and a main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the PC, or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from the time of turning on, and an error cancellation after turning on the power (after a period of time when the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period of time has passed since turning on the power) And a function to perform. The main control board 4100 does not have an error canceling function that the payout control board 4110 has. Therefore, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 4100 has a built-in main control. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the RAM.

  The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is not operated, while the logic is HI from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is operated. The operation signal thus obtained is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 69, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch provided on the dispensing control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch on the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch is provided. Pulled up to + 12V side by pull-up resistor. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is inputted as LOW, while the operation switch is operated. Sometimes, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor, and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. The When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the main control MPU 4100a does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM. To do.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch is operated, an operation signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor and becomes logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also configured. It will be turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The The main control MPU 4100a instructs to clear the RAM for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. to decide.

  The operation signal from the operation switch is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, it is higher than the control reference voltage +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general prize opening switch 3020 and the start opening switch 3022 that are directly input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor, while the panel shown in FIG. The detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, the gate switch of the effective gate, and the gate switch that triggers the normal lottery input via the relay terminal plate 4161 are the main control. Since the signal is not directly input to the substrate 4100, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and detects a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning signal in addition to the main control MPU 4100a when detecting a power failure or instantaneous power failure sign. 4110 is output to the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 70, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 70, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end connected to the + 12V power line and the other end of the resistor. The other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND) is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of output in the main control-side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs a payout blackout notice signal to the payout control board 4110 and also outputs to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral blackout notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 4100b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a has a D-type flip-flop as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input port PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. In the circuit 4120b, one end of the circuit 4120b is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function for outputting the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In FIG. 6, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). 4140 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is sent out to the payout control board 4110 No reset function to output as a power failure warning signal The control circuit 4100cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 4140. The logic of the signal is inverted and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control input circuit 4100b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting between the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, between the boards with 4110 and between the boards with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, Dispensing control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

  Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 61 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a main payout serial data transmission signal and do not have a reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the payout control board 4110 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 61 from the TXB terminal. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as the start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 61 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b. Etc.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is outputted from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. To the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various display output to the reset function main control output circuit 4100ca the issue.

  Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

  + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 69 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The unit 4100aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 4100aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec and transmits it. When transmission is performed from the shift register 4100aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 69 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and has the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When electric power or a momentary power failure occurs, + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is sent to the main control MPU 4100a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 4100cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being broken, and to prevent omission of the command, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a reset that causes all of the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

  Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 73 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 74 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 73, and FIG. FIG. 76 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 77 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 to which + 5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 77 is applied and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply board 851 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed from the +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the like. .

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 67 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not flow. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the payout control unit 4120 is reset as a peripheral circuit in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

  As shown in FIG. 72, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 72, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

  The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 72, and the blackout monitor circuit 4100e included in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 62, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and the like. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full switch and the various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 62 have an output terminal of an open collector output type. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is substantially the same, here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described.

  The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) when the door frame is opened from the main body frame, and the door frame is closed by the main body frame. The switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. This is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR20 is The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, thereby turning on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to the + 5V side so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, When the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame opened from the outer frame, and the body frame is closed to the outer frame. The switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 61 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 4100 is electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 4100 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 3 does not occur during a normal game, and an outer end frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer edge because it is designed to be entered The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer frame door opening information output signal. Although it cannot be determined whether or not the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body is not used for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 4100 even when a normally open switch is used or a disconnection occurs. An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  A transmission line for transmitting a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the dispensing control board 4110. When the condition is satisfied, the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. In some cases, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 4100e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU4100a are the same logic.

  The detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. The output terminal of the full switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and electrically connected to the first terminal of the full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. This full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 via the resistor PR44b. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off in response to a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is controlled by the payout control via the handle relay terminal plate and the power supply board 851. In the substrate 4110, a signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and becomes logic HI is input to the payout control substrate 4110. On the other hand, when the storage space is full with the game balls stored, The voltage applied to the output terminal of the tan switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851, and the signal whose logic becomes LOW is outputted. 4110 is input.

  When the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is applied to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851. When a signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) and has a logic low level is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, a full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to a switch circuit constituted by the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full switch three-terminal filter PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 62 are T-type filter circuits such as a full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. It is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit attached to the door frame, it is compared with the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. provided in the prize ball device attached to the main body frame 3. Then, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit is filled with the stored game balls, and the payout control MPU 4120a receives from the full tank switch 550. Based on the detection signal, when it is determined that the storage space is full with the game balls stored, the drive control of the payout motor 7 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is stopped. It is like that. In other words, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped, or the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the storage space is full with the stored game balls. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by rotating the payout rotator and continuing to pay out the game ball, the payout rotator itself can no longer rotate and the payout motor 744 The load is abnormal, the payout motor is overloaded, abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the mechanism that transmits the rotary shaft of the payout motor to the rotary motion of the payout rotor is broken. Sometimes referred to or. Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted so that a noise signal is first removed from the detection signal from the full switch 550 in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50.

  The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43, and the signal changes as an RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Is input.

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 69 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 860a repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a previous-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time of turning on the power). In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 860a is the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic clear signal HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW because the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied thereto, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4120da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor driving voltage, and the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 through the Zener diode PZD60 The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, and supplied to the dispensing motor 744.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 744. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

  Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 63 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 63 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 is connected to a rental device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 76, an input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. 72 through ICPIC 80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 851 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 851. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 851. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Then, the BRDY signal whose logic applied to HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal notifying that the one-time payout operation is started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. The photocoupler PIC 73 is turned OFF when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the non-reset payout control output circuit 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, and when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

  Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives serial data from the main control board 4100 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b as shown in FIG. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a has the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout blackout signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) For example, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. 62, and detection signals from the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 62 are respectively input via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Or outputs a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and outputs a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. For example, a payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function outputs the payer ACK signal. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 62 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to drive the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the payout control board 4110 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probabilistic fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and middle information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

  The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), in addition to the outer frame door opening information output signal described above, an award ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor, From the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to jackpot information output signals such as 15 round jackpot information output signals and 2 round jackpot information output signals, information output signals during probability variation, special symbol display information output signals The game information signals such as the normal symbol display information output signal, the time reduction information output signal, and the start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits and the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a player determines whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits. For example, a big hit of 15 rounds may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit of two rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of big hits for rounds and the number of occurrences of big hits for two rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of big hits for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of big hit gaming status, Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 79 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 79 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 79, and FIG. 81 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch 3020, the start opening switch 3022, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. Based on the above, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740), which is a storage tray, is a game ball as a rental ball. When such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “CR machine”, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), a payout control board is connected from the main control board 4100. Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to 4110. One prize ball is designated by command 10H, and two prize balls are designated by command 11H. ..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor for the designated number of prize balls. .

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball rental machine are electrically connected (such pachinko gaming machine). 78 (b)), as shown in FIG. 78 (b), command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. 1 designates one prize ball, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,..., 15 prize balls are designated by the command 2EH. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 78 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

  The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 61. As shown in FIG. 79, the division of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning one special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the switch of the second starting port, and as shown in FIG. 79, the second special symbol of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. The display 1186 is composed of commands with names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the winning prize opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the 1st to 16th round winning opening 1 opening (the Nth round of the winning prize opening 2003) Opening or opening start) is indicated, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command designates the opening of the big winning opening 1 between rounds (the closing of the big winning opening 2003 during the closing or the start of closing). The winning prize 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize 2003 detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 61). The jackpot ending command is an instruction to start the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is a jackpot symbol information. It is an indication of the display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or opening of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count switch 2110 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2100). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100) and is sent to the winning prize. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the winning prize opening 1 (when the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2103 is counted. The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning opening (when a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. 62). Or give instructions).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, Is executed, and a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The general pattern synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 61. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands with the names of production start, universal symbol designation, universal figure synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  The ordinary electric role effect is related to the movable piece 2005b that is opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 61. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Display and Ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is for instructing the start of opening per base map, and the general power open display command is for instructing the start during the opening of the general power (the state where the movable piece is expanded by driving the start solenoid). In addition, the ending command per universal map is an instruction to start ending per universal map.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of opening per universal figure, and the general electric open display command is displayed when the normal electric is released (when the movable piece is expanded by driving the start opening solenoid). The ending command per common map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the notification display is divided into a prize abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door frame opening, a door frame closing, a main body frame opening, and a main body frame closing. It consists of commands named These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is in operation) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 even though it is not a big hit). (When the count switch 2110 detects), an instruction to start winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, disconnection of electrical connection between the main control board 4100, the start port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, and the like.・ Instructs the start of disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when a short circuit occurs. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is shown in FIG. It is an indication of the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024.

  The door frame opening command is sent from the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door frame closing command is used for the door frame closing command based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When it is in a closed state, an instruction to end the door opening notification is given. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command indicates that the main body frame opens from the outer frame based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The main body frame close command indicates that the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame based on a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the body frame release notification.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is one of the start port switch 3022, the count switch 2110, etc., which is disconnected or short-circuited. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door frame opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame is opened to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619) and the body frame closing is performed. The command is transmitted when the main body frame is detected to be closed (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned “7 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 80, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 64). Inspects various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2005c based on a detection signal from the start opening switch 3022. The command to change the movement shortening operation is instructed to change the state from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state. The special symbol 1 storage command is used for instructing the state transition from the probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 storage command is 0-4 special symbols 1 held (the game ball enters the first start port 2001 and the function display board The first special symbol display tells the number of balls that have not yet been used for variable display of the special symbol (reserved number), and the special symbol 2 storage command has 0-4 special symbol 2 reservations (second start) The game ball enters the mouth 2005c and the second special symbol display on the function display board informs the number of balls not yet used (the number of holdings) for the variation display of the special symbol. , Normal symbol 1 hold 0-4 pieces (the number of balls that have not yet been used for normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display on the function display board through the normal gate portion 2005a) The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is used to pre-read the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display on the first special symbol display of the function display board. Instructs the start of a prefetching effect to notify the advance notice of the display result based on the first special symbol display unit, and the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command is the second special symbol display unit of the function display board that holds the special symbol 2 Special Before being used in the variable display of symbols, it is an indication of the prefetch effect initiation of notifying the advance notice of the display result of the second special symbol indicator based on the special symbol 2 pending read ahead.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch, (When a game ball enters the second starting port 2005c based on the detection signal from the mouth switch), the voice is mainly received from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change has been confirmed (after the lapse stop period has elapsed), and the high probability end designation command is transmitted. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the elapse of the stoppage period), and the special symbol 1 storage command is stored. When the number of balls changes (in a state where a game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and there is a number of reserves that are not yet used for the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display of the function display board, the second Sent when the game ball enters the starting port 2005c and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the second special symbol display to display the variation of the special symbol from the number of holds) The special symbol 2 memory command is used when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the second start opening 2005c and is still used for the special symbol change display on the second special symbol display of the function display board. Used when the number of reserved balls increases when the number of held balls increases and the number of held balls increases in the second start opening 2005c, or when the number of held balls increases, And when the number of holds decreases) The normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2005a and is not used yet for the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display of the function display board). When there is a game ball passing through the gate part and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases from the number of holds used to display the normal symbol display normal symbol variation) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 actuated holding balls increases (when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 and the number of holdings increases), the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is transmitted. The effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 actuated reserved balls is increased (when a game ball enters the second start opening 2005c and the number of retained balls increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is transmitted mainly for voice notification from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame at the start opening winning prize. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 64 uses the start opening prize command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by sound from a speaker housed in a speaker box provided in the main body frame and a speaker 130 provided in the door frame, in order to monitor the presence or absence of fraud The specification is to use. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening prize command, and the voice is received from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. Some specifications do not report.

  Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 81, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared, and bit 0 (B0, “B”) in the ball breakage. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) includes a ball round, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the ball round, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). Value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 62 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

  Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs). If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings) are executed. , Setting interrupt timing, etc.).

  If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM. If the RAM clear switch for instructing clearing of backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) during the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 is activated to the peripheral control board 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. Note that the backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  This process at the time of power interruption occurs when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery) In this process, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, the timer interrupt process is performed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S18 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, the normal electric accessory (movable piece 2005b) is controlled, and the open / close state of the second starter 2005c is changed. Execute. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress of the game. A special electric accessory (that is, an opening / closing member 2006 that opens and closes the big prize opening 2003 by an attacker solenoid) is controlled, and a process of changing the open / closed state of the big prize opening 2003 is executed.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit determination or big hit lottery), the big hit gaming state in the big hit determination A special jackpot symbol used to determine the special symbol stop symbol (the symbol associated with the jackpot type (probability jackpot, number of rounds, etc.)) Reach determination random number, special symbol display 641, used for determination (reach determination) on whether or not to perform a high expectation effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that neither a big win nor a small win (losing) is determined A variable display pattern random number (variable time fluctuation) used to determine the special symbol variable display pattern (variable time, etc.) displayed in 642 ) Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece in an open state to open and close the second start hole 2005c (usually lottery per determination), and the like.

  As will be described later, the jackpot determination random number according to this embodiment is also used to determine whether or not a specific condition to be performed when it is determined that the jackpot is lost (lost) is satisfied. Is done. Also, the jackpot design random number is the type of jackpot to be performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won (whether the probability variation function or the time shortening function is activated, the big winning game in the jackpot game (special bonus game)) This is also used for the determination of the jackpot type in which the opening mode of 2003 is determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol per random determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2005b is controlled to be opened. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the movable piece 2005b to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant, and the player Can be prevented from being disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

  Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, first and second start opening prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2005c. Then, after the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

  More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ( YES in step S120), a fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), after setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery, the processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (either the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator) After the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) from the start to the stop display is determined, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. Stop the fluctuation display. Thereafter, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to “3”. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied even though the big hit is lost (the win is won for the small hit), the processing selection flag is updated to “4”. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the type of jackpot is determined, and after the release mode (number of rounds, opening time, game ball winning limit number, etc.) at the big prize opening 2003 according to the type is set, the processing flag is set. It is updated to “5”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game start process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game starting process, after the opening mode (opening number and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening and closing member 2006) at the big winning opening 2003 according to the small hit is set, the processing flag is set to “6”. Is updated.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game process (step S240) is executed. In the jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode at the big prize opening 2003 set in the jackpot game start process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after determining whether or not to operate the probability variation function or the time reduction function. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is 6 and the small hit game processing (step S250) is executed. In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation applied to the open / close member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode at the big winning opening 2003 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). In addition, when the small hit game process ends, the process flag is updated to “0”, that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  As described above, when any one of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

  Next, the first / second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start opening winning processes.

  In the first / second start opening winning process (step S110), the process is mainly related to a process for determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first start opening 2001 or the second start opening 2005c, and the winning. On the condition that it is determined that there has been, the process related to the update of the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor (switch), it is determined that a game ball has been won at the second start port 2005c (YES in step S201). Next, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the second holding is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a, first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second start opening 2005c (a big hit determination random number, for a big hit symbol) A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol or the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has been won at the second start opening 2005c (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the suspension display on the second start opening 2005c side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like through the control by the peripheral control board 4140, this can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value 4 If it is determined, the next step S205 is to determine whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor, it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 2001 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (such as the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  In other words, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first start port 2001 (a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) as the first start hold storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command is set, which indicates that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 2001 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S17). With such a configuration, it is possible to update the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the like on hold on the first start port 2001 side quickly through control by the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that no game ball has been won at the first start port 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) for the second starting port 2005c is executed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) for the first starting port 2001 is executed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed, the winning process for the second starting port 2005c may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of big hit lottery, probability variation lottery, small hit lottery, and variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is preliminarily determined. It is a process to determine. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number with the preceding determination table, the lottery result when the lottery is performed using the random number (whether the big hit or the small hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) (The determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (predetermined determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (the effect is “read ahead”). Also called “Direction”).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition. When the game condition does not satisfy the specific condition, the main control MPU 4100a A winning notification command that does not represent a result may be transmitted. For example, when the fluctuation display resulting from winning at the first start port 2001 is not started immediately after winning, but is suspended, the main control MPU 4100a displays a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process related to the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits a winning notification command that does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be. The specific conditions related to the second start opening 2005c may be the same.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values (first start memory) of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642. It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start memory number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 are the storage areas for the first start memory and the second start memory (special symbol random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (see FIG. 94). Therefore, if both of the values of the holding number counter are “0” in this step S301 (YES), the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are related. When it is determined that none of the start conditions is satisfied, and the process flag is updated to “1” as the process of step S318, the variation start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both the first start memory number and the second start memory number are not “0” (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery that is in the hold state. Shift processing is performed in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (steps S302 to S310).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 94A, the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). As shown in FIG. 94 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, and the like are stored. A jackpot symbol random number storage area 4581 is provided.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side Although there is no difference in the expected value of the benefits (such as the number of winning balls that can be earned) given to the player in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, On the other hand, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, there is a chance that it will be won, and the probability of winning on the small hit is “0%”, so only the lottery process on the second special symbol side is executed As much as possible, the small hit gaming state is not generated.

  In this regard, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the winning (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device is not won. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that all the lotteries (the lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning at the second starting port 2005c are digested first. As a result, until the number of holds for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes “0”, only the game (the lottery on the second special symbol side) that is not won in the above-mentioned small win is sequentially performed. Will be able to. In addition, as will be described later, in the game state in which the so-called time-shortening function is activated, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested, is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game ball to the second start opening 2005c, which is the trigger for the execution of the game, the continuous execution of only the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side is performed. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 94, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested. Whether or not the value of the holding number counter (second starting storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is “0”, that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. Judge whether or not. As a result, if it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second storage area [1] 4532a stores the second random number. A random number related to the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). In other words, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number), as well as the processing related to the jackpot lottery, the special symbol variation pattern (variation Games for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, processing for setting the gaming state, etc. The second start game can be progressed with the winning of the ball.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532d) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (step S304). Accordingly, at least the storage area [4] 4532d is vacant, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp is performed so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting state in the second special symbol memory display 644. Is called. Note that the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 94, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and obtained (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is not only the process related to the jackpot lottery, but also the process related to the setting of the special symbol variation pattern, the process related to the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, and the setting of the gaming state As a result, the first start game can be progressed by winning the game ball at the first start port 2001.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage areas) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are respectively shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d is vacant, and new start information (hold) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “2” in the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side (first start game) is in progress (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). Further, at this time, the drive control related to lighting of the lamp 643 is also performed so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol memory display 643. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to “2” is reset when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot Select a highly set table. In this example, the probability of a big hit is set to 1/400 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal), and the probability of being a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). / 400.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the big hit determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not a random number (hit value) corresponding to (step S315 (hit lottery)). If it is a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number for any special symbol acquired in the same manner in step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S319). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S320), assuming that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not the small hit value (NO in step S319), the process proceeds to step S318 without going through step S320, assuming that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied. In step S318, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. In this example, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, random numbers generated with a random number range of, for example, 0 to 99 as the jackpot symbol random number. Numeric values are prepared, and in the processing of step S303 or step S307, one of these random values is acquired as the value of the random number for the big hit symbol. Then, the acquired random number value is used for the process of determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, the jackpot A is determined. If it is 53-57, it is determined as big hit B, if it is 58-63, it is determined as big hit C, if it is 64-81, it is determined as big hit D, and if it is 82-99, it is determined as big hit E. .

  According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 95, the probability that the type of jackpot (the hit with the operation of the condition device) is determined to be “big hit A” is “53%”, and the type of jackpot The probability that the jackpot is determined to be “big hit B” is “5%”, the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit C” is “6%”, and the jackpot type is “big hit D”, “big hit” The probability of being determined as “E” is “18%”, respectively.

  Here, when “hit A” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the corresponding win, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of that big hit A is performed, the probability variation function and the short-time function (open) Both of these are controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of them are activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot A, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as a long-open game where the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated many times (16 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. The long-time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the following conditions is satisfied: In the long-time opening / closing pattern, the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened is longer than the time for which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened in the small-time opening / closing pattern described later. That is, in the game per long opening, a large amount of prize balls (about 1750 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, even when “big hit B” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit B is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function ( Both are controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of them are operated. However, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot B, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as a middle-open game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment). . That is, in the game per middle opening, a medium amount of prize balls (about 1000 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, if “big hit C” is won, the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit C will be given only when the gaming state at the time of the winning is “external advantageous gaming state in which the time reduction function operates”. After being performed, it is controlled to a probability changing external advantageous gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the time shortening function (open extension function) are activated. However, if the game state at the time of the selection is not the “external advantageous game state in which the time reduction function operates”, after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension extension) Function) is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function is activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot C, the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment).

  On the other hand, when “big hit D” is won, regardless of the gaming state when the big win is won, after the big hit game corresponding to the big win D is won, the probability variation function and the short time function (open) (Extended function), and the high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function operates is controlled. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot D, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening, which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in the present embodiment).

  On the other hand, when “big hit E” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the hit, after the big hit game according to the win of the big hit E is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension function) The game is controlled to a normal game state (normally an external disadvantageous game state) in which none of the functions is activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot E, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in the present embodiment).

  Incidentally, when such a big hit A to E (hit with the operation of the condition device) is selected as a small hit (hit without the operation of the condition device), the opening / closing member 2006 is opened and closed for a short time. The game is only played per small opening (small hit game) repeated a small number of times (in this embodiment, twice in this embodiment), and the same game was played before the small opening game (small hit game) was played. There is no such thing as a different gaming state. Note that the small time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined small time (for example, 3 to 6 seconds) has elapsed after the opening / closing member 2006 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined small number (for example, two) of games. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the winning conditions is satisfied in the big winning opening 2003. In other words, in the game per small opening (small winning game), since only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be obtained by the player as a privilege, the opening / closing member 2006 operates. In spite of this, it can be said that attention should be paid to the handling (positioning) of the game design in that the game interest may decrease.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, “big hit A” to “big hit E” are prepared as types of hits (big hits) that accompany the operation of the condition device. Therefore, the processing in step S317 will be described in more detail. When the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit flag A is turned on (set), and when the big hit type is “big hit B”, the big hit flag B is turned on (set). ), The big hit flag C is turned on (set) when it is “big hit C”, the big hit flag D is turned on (set) when it is “big hit D”, and the big hit flag E is set when it is “big hit E”. It will be in the ON state (set).

  Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the big hit flag “ON” as the process of step S401. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the big hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), the big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed in order to set the fluctuation pattern when the big hit is won. This is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not “ON”, it is next determined in step S403 whether or not the small hit flag is “ON”. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S403), it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied although it is lost, and the small hit is won. In order to set the fluctuation pattern at the time, a small hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed (step S404).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not “ON”, then in step S405, a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect, etc.) with a high degree of expectation for winning the big hit is obtained. Judge whether or not to perform. In the process of step S405, for example, when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87) is a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is performed, and the acquired reach When the determination random number is not a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is not performed. As a result, if it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), a high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that a variation pattern for performing the high expectation effect is set. This is performed (step S406).

  Regarding the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the random numbers for reach determination, the normal external disadvantaged game state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time reduction function operates) It is also possible to make the game state different for each of the game states of the probability change external disadvantage game state (only the probability change function is activated) and the probability change external advantage game state (both the probability change function and the time reduction function are activated). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the probability that it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is Although it is “1/12”, in the normal external advantageous game state and the probabilistic external advantageous game state, the degree of expectation at the time of reach is further increased (or efficient holding and digestion is performed). Alternatively, it may be determined that the high-expected performance should be performed with a lower probability. On the other hand, in the probable external disadvantaged game state, it is determined that a high-expected performance should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of a big hit can be made more conscious. Also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S405 that a high-expected effect with a high degree of expectation for winning the big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the loss variation pattern when the high-expected effect is not performed. In order to set (a normal loss variation pattern), a low-expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expected loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in association with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value. When this is the case, the shortening variation is performed.

  However, in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, the fluctuation time is set so that the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side where the probability of winning a small hit is “0” is difficult to break. Is set. More specifically, when the number of reserves on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the shortened variation is not used in spite of the gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, and the shortened variation is employed in the normal gaming state. Only the variation time (variation time longer than the shortening variation in the normal gaming state) having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when not being played is selected. In addition, the variation time on the first special symbol side will not adopt the shortened variation regardless of the number of reserves, only the variation time having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when the shortened variation is not adopted in the normal gaming state. Is to be selected. As a result, when the gaming machine is in a game state in which the short-time function is activated, it is possible to suppress the holding of the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a small hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

  As will be described later, as shown in FIG. 88, when the selection table for the variation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, step S406, and step S407, the main control MPU 4100a In step S410, a special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the set selection table. Next, in step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as an effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) or the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command that shows the winning type, including winning and winning hits).

  Furthermore, the value of the variation time according to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is performed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The change display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as a device is started. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 84 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern shown by the effect command and the information shown by the winning information command through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Thus, the display effect is performed.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. The first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is extended to the period after the stop of the variable display related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the second special symbol display without being finished within the variation time of the variation pattern. And may be executed so as to indicate that the winning is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device (extended effect pattern in FIG. 104 (b)). In other words, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when a game per small opening is executed, a display effect that encourages the acquisition of a prize ball does not appear, and it is relatively early after it is shown that a big hit is lost. It is possible to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol hold-up), so that the extension that may give some expectation as an effect until the opening / closing member 2006 operates is preferably avoided. Become.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a special effect is provided with respect to the display effect at the time of the small hit (extended loss effect) described above, which indicates that the big hit is lost after the special symbol is stopped. There is also a display effect (extended jackpot effect) that shows that the winner is won after the symbol stops. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 does not end within the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the first special The symbol display or the second special symbol display was won for winning (big hit) with the operation of the condition device after extending to the period after the stop of the variable display on the LED lighting pattern (Extended effect pattern in FIG. 104 (b)).

  In other words, in this case, the display effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as a simple loss effect (highly expected loss variation pattern) that appears when the big hit is lost. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. Can be suppressed.

  However, as the function display unit of the pachinko machine 1, eight LED groups that do not form a specific symbol may be adopted instead of the 7-segment LED. In this example, the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator constituted by 7 segment LEDs are each constituted by eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display and the second special symbol memory display are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display is constituted by two LEDs.

  This function display unit can achieve the same effect as described above, and the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are configured by eight LED groups that do not have any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case where the 7-segment LED having the meaning by the numerical symbols is used. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the contents displayed on the function display unit, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to production images and the like.

  When such a function display unit is adopted, the lighting mode (when the special symbol is stopped) of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hit, It is desirable to perform control so that it appears as an aspect that is similar to each other, such as a difference from whether or not one LED is lit up from the lighting state of the symbol (when the special symbol is stopped). That is, in this case, when the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped, it is immediately determined which result is obtained (at least after the effect is extended). It will be difficult to grasp until a short time has elapsed until the winning is clearly indicated. Therefore, it is possible not only to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), but also to the period after the special symbol stops due to a decrease in interest in the special symbol (multiple LEDs). Even a display effect that has been made can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the guessing that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 due to the particularity when the extended effect appears, and as a result, according to the winning of the small hit It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of big hit will be described based on FIG. FIG. 96 is a table showing an example of the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, the normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and the normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3. 96 in the winning column in FIG. 96 means a big hit, △ means establishment of a specific condition at the time of losing (small hit), and x means failure of a specific condition at the time of losing (pure loss). means.

  As described above, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 88), the main control MPU 4100a is won as a jackpot as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 88). The big hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of the change is set.

  In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function only) Operation) and a probability change external advantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time shortening function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different big hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time-saving function are both disabled). 96 is selected regardless of the type of jackpot, the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 96 is selected.

  As described above, when the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87) while referring to the selected table T1. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbols, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1. Among them, nine specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 9%), and 20 specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selection rate at big hit 20%), 30 specific values are assigned to variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (selection rate at big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are It is assigned to the fluctuation number 12 (fluctuation time Td1) (selection rate at big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 15 (fluctuation time Te) (selection rate 1 at big hit) %). Thus, except for the big hit fixed variation number 15, the number of specific values (hit values) allocated tends to increase as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the big hit is won with the effect content “a (or a ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect is performed and the change number 5 (change time Tb1) is selected, the winning content is won with the effect content “b (or b ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is displayed, and when the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, the big win is won with the content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the change number 12 (change time Td1) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the event that a display effect indicating that the player has won the jackpot is performed and the change number 15 (change time Te1) is selected, the effect content “e” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect is shown to indicate that the winner is won. Incidentally, the production content a, the production content a ′, the production content b ′, the production content b ′, the production content c, the production content c ′, the production content d, the production content d ′, and the production content e are all in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The types of display effects that appear (for example, the types of reach effects and the types of story effects) are different.

  As will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. The fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

  As described above, in the normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). The effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command “01H” for variation number 1) and the winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning points per win) Command) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta1 if the variation number is 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, if it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is selected. Then, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, which of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side was won? Regardless of whether or not the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected, when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed, and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed Thus, display effects with different contents may appear by selecting the big hit variation pattern table having different contents.

  Also, when it is determined that the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 96 is selected regardless of the big hit type. However, based on the state of the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit type, any of the normal big hit variation pattern tables prepared for each big hit type may be selectively used.

  That is, in this case, the selection rate of the variation pattern can be made different according to the type of jackpot, and when a specific variation pattern appears, there is a bias such as increasing the probability of being a jackpot of a specific type. It becomes like this. In addition, even if the variation time is the same, the variation number (production command) can be made different according to the type of jackpot. In this case, just by confirming the production command, The type of jackpot can be grasped. Therefore, if the appropriateness is determined by comparing the effect command and the winning information command on the peripheral control board 4140 side, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. Will be able to.

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 88), the main control MPU 4100a performs the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 88). A small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern when winning is set.

  In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function) Only) and a probability-variable external advantageous gaming state (both probability-changing function and time-shortening function are operating). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time reduction function) When it is determined that there is no operation, the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 96 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a obtains by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 877) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that a value from “0” to “99” can be acquired as the random display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained. Among the values, 35 specific values are allocated to the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at small hit 35%), and 30 specific values are the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2). (Selection rate at small hit 30%), 30 specific values are allocated to variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate at small hit 20%), 5 A specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 13 (fluctuation time Td2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 5%). In this way, the number assigned to a specific value (small hit value) tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display that shows the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, the display of the result of the big hit lottery is shown while the effect content “b (or b ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the production is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, the display of the big hit lottery result is displayed with the production content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, the effect “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Display performance the result of the lottery is shown is carried out. By the way, as such a display effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is shown, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit is lost, or a game state in which a winning ball can be obtained by the operation of the opening and closing member 2006 is transferred. A display effect (display effect that appears even when a big win is won) or the like is appropriately adopted.

  As will also be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result is obtained as a big hit lottery with the production content “a (or a ′)” appearing. A directing of what was done appears. The fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (fluctuation time) When the number 6) is selected, the production contents “b (or b ′)” appear, and a production of a pair appears as to what result was obtained as the big hit lottery. Further, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tc1 based on the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (fluctuation number 9) or the fluctuation time Tc2 (fluctuation time). When the number 10) is selected, the production contents “c (or c ′)” appear in each case, and a pair of productions appear as to what results were obtained as the big hit lottery. The variation time Td2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) of the variation time Td1 based on the variation time Td1, and the variation time Td1 (variation number 12) or the variation time Td2 (variation time). When the number 13) is selected, the production contents “d (or d ′)” appear in each case, and a pair production of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

As described above, in such a normal small hit variation pattern table T2, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). And an effect command (for example, command “02H” for variation number 2) associated with the determined variation pattern, and a winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning hits per win) Are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta2 for variation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. Set (Step S41
3) The processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state Is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted. However, when a small win is won in a gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) It is desirable that the same display process as the low-expected effect at the time).

  Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of highly expected production will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 88) that a highly anticipated effect should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a performs high expectation as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 88). In order to set a variation pattern when performing an effect, a highly expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

  Even in this high-expected loss variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state ( It is determined whether the game state is one of the probability variation function only) and the probability variation external advantageous game state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high expectation loss variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function, time reduction function) 96 is selected, the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 96 is selected.

  As described above, when the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and performs the process in step S303 (see FIG. 87). Based on the obtained variation display pattern random number, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbol, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3. 40 specific values are allocated to variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selection rate 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are variation number 4 (variation time) Ta4) (selection rate at high expectation loss 17%) and 25 specific values are assigned to change number 7 (change time Tb3) (selection rate at high expectation loss 25%) , 13 specific values are allocated to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at the time of high expectation loss), and 3 specific values are allocated to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (Selection rate at the time of high expectation loss) %), Selectivity of 2% during the two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3) (High disappointing). In this way, the number of specific values (loss values) allocated tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, the winning content was lost on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “a, no development (or a ′)” appearing. When the display effect is displayed and the change number 4 (change time Ta4) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has been defeated in the big win while the effect content “a, with development” appears. Is displayed, or a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated in a big win with the effect content “c ′” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When the effect is displayed, a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated with a big hit is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content “b, no development (or b ′)” appearing. When the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, a display effect or a liquid crystal display indicating that the player has lost the jackpot with the effect content “b, with development” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect is displayed on the display device 1400 and the winning effect is “d ′” and the winning effect is shown, and the change number 11 (change time Tc3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed. When the production content “c (or c ′)” is displayed, the display production is performed to indicate that the player has lost the jackpot. When the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, the liquid crystal display In the device 1400, a display effect is shown which indicates that the player has lost the jackpot while the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears. By the way, as will be described later, when the variation number is 4 or 8, it appears as a loss production pattern with different production contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Since the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern which is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side is set. In response to this, it is possible to cause production patterns having different jackpot expectations.

  Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2), or the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, the production content “a” appears, A production of a pair about whether the result was obtained appears. However, when the variation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the production content “a” is displayed until the opening period before the opening / closing member 2003 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) according to the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that becomes the pair of the variation number 4 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 ( When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the production contents “b” appear, and a pair of productions appear as to what result was obtained as a big hit lottery. However, when the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content “b” is displayed until the opening period before the opening / closing member 2003 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2006. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) in accordance with the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, the change number of the jackpot effect pattern that is the pair of the change number 8 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the change number 5 and the change number 12 as described above.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). Then, an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (eg, command “03H” for variation number 3) and a winning information command (including winning and winning points for winning and winning the winning combination) The command indicating the seed is set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta3 for variation number 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is displayed. A selection is made, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  According to such a normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, a normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3, the big hit expectation degree is a display effect b rather than a display effect a. The display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the jackpot is won, it is determined that the jackpot is won when the effect e appears.

  Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the change time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 88) as the process of step S501. It is determined whether or not the time is up. If the variation time set in the timer is not up (NO in step S501), the variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is performed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of special symbols) related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as a container is ended. In addition, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect should be confirmed and displayed on the peripheral control board 4140 in order to end the display effect. Is set (step S503). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode in the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended despite the reception of the definite stop command, and the subsequent opening period As described above, the display effect may be controlled so that the display effect is extended.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to “3” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the special symbol is suspended, as indicated by the fact that the big win is won (step S505). Then, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON but the loss is a big hit (NO in step S504), it is next determined in step S506 whether the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to “4” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the process stage where the special symbol is suspended as indicated by winning the small hit (step S506). S507), the process during change is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON but is a pure loss (a loss that does not satisfy the specific condition) (NO in step S506), it is special to indicate that both the big hit and the small hit are lost. The processing flag is updated to “0” on the assumption that the symbol is in the processing stage where the variation is stopped (step S508), and the variation processing is terminated. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S130.

  Next, the big hit game start process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first activates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as a process of step S2602, a function (probability variation function) that increases the winning probability of winning (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device than when in the normal external disadvantageous game state or the normal external advantageous game state is being operated ( It is determined whether the state is a probability variation state. As a result, when it is determined that the game state is one of the probability variation external disadvantage game state and the probability variation external advantageous game state and the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S602), the probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S603).

  Next, as a process of step S604, a function (time-short function) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2005c is in operation (time-short game state) while the operation of the probability variation function is stopped in this way. It is determined whether or not. If it is not determined in step S602 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing step S603. As a result, when it is determined that either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the probable variation external advantageous gaming state is in effect and the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S604), the time reduction function is activated. Stop (step S605).

  Next, in order to allow the big hit game to be performed while the operations of the probability variation function and the short time function are stopped in this way, as a process of step S606, the round winning game 2003 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game. The maximum number of times (in this embodiment, 16 times or 9 times), the upper limit number (predetermined large number) at which a game ball can enter the winning prize opening 2003 in each round game, The opening mode in the big hit game, such as the opening / closing operation restriction time of the opening / closing member 2006 in the game (a predetermined long time of the long time opening / closing pattern) is set. That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 87). Information relating to the “opening mode in jackpot game” prepared in association with each type of jackpot (hit A to jackpot E) thus determined is read from the ROM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is read out and the read out information is set. As a result, the big hit game can be executed with the above-described opening mode corresponding to the big hit type (big hit A to big hit E). If it is not determined in step S604 that the time saving function is in operation, step S606 is performed without executing step S605.

  After that, before the big hit game is played, an interval production (for example, an opening production such as “Congratulations” or a challenge bonus production such as “Obtain a chance to win!”) Is executed. As is possible, an interval effect command at the time of a big hit indicating the time until the special bonus game (big hit game) is started after the special symbol is stopped is set (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped (as described above. Since the extension effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is prepared based on this. That is, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit because of the time required for the extended effect that appears even when winning the small hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 84, so that the specific effect time indicated by the command is set (for example, 8 seconds). Through the later-described control by the peripheral control board 4140 side, either the interval effect as described above or the extended effect as described above is selectively performed in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 is set (step S608), and the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609). Then, the jackpot game start process is terminated.

  Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 91, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the same small hit game as the process of step S701 so that the small open game (small hit game) is performed. The number of times that the grand prize opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the game (in this embodiment, twice), the upper limit number (predetermined small number) that allows the game balls to enter the big prize opening 2003 at the time of opening, The opening mode in the small opening game (small hit game) such as the opening / closing operation restriction time (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2006 is set.

  After that, prior to the small opening game (small winning game) being performed, an interval effect before the small game is performed (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as “Chance to get a chance!”) Can be executed. As described above, an interval effect command at the time of small hit indicating the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the small bonus game (small hit game) is started is set (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped when the small hit is won (as described above. Therefore, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, due to the relationship with the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big hit is won, a specific fixed time (for example, the big hit symbol) is used regardless of the symbol random number (big hit symbol) Only the interval effect command indicating 8 seconds) is set. Such a time setting when the extended effect appears is prevented from being presumed to be a small hit, and as a result, the opening / closing member 2006 is operated in response to the winning of the small hit, and the game entertainment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the process flag is updated to “6” (step S704). Then, the small hit game start process is terminated.

  As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

  Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a big hit game in-process flag indicating that the big hit game has already been performed as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in an ON state (set).

  Here, the big hit game in-progress flag is operated in the OFF state when there is a processing status immediately after the transition to the big hit game processing (step S240). Therefore, when it is in the processing status immediately after shifting to the big hit game process (step S240), it is determined that the big hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the process in step S802 I do.

  In the process of step S802, whether or not the above-described interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, challenge bonus effect for determining the opening of the big prize opening 2003 (confirming the execution of the bonus game), or extension effect) is completed, that is, It is determined whether the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 90) has expired. The interval effect timer (8 seconds here) has not expired, and the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect for determining the big hit, challenge bonus effect for determining the opening of the big prize opening 2003, or extension effect) is still being executed. In that case (NO in step S802), the jackpot game process is temporarily terminated, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) expires through the processes of steps S801 and S802 (repeats the interrupt process). It will be.

  However, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, even when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired as a result of such processing (YES in step S802), only this is a big hit Judgment as to whether or not the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n (specific reception port) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired so that the game does not start. Is performed (step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the big hit game process is temporarily ended, and the process waits until it is determined in the process of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n ( By repeating the interruption process), the opening / closing means 2006 of the big prize opening 2003 is received until the game ball is received by the valid gate 6010n after the time (in this case, 8 seconds) determined by the interval effect timer has expired. It is made to carry out extension maintenance control in the closed state, without operating this.

  According to such extended control over the closing control period of the big winning opening 2003, the closing control period (opening / closing member 2006) from when the special symbol is stopped to when the big winning game is started based on the winning of the big hit. The period from when the special symbol is stopped to when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires is defined as “predetermined after the special symbol is stopped and displayed”. When the first closed control period having the determined length is set (step S802), after the first closed control period has elapsed, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is set. The "closed control period" appears further (step S803). Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel effect that mutually uses an attribute as a closing control period having a predetermined length and an attribute as a closing control period having an indefinite length. .

  More specifically, for the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, it is used as an addition time with the change time of the set special symbol change pattern. As one unit, it is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a closed control period having a predetermined length, such as performing a display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by extending the display of special symbols. become able to. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect for the big hit lottery may be executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period. Yes. On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n), for example, a long movie until the opening / closing member 2006 operates using the same period is liquid crystal. An effect using an attribute as a closed control period having an indefinite length, such as flowing on the display device 1400, can be realized. That is, for the second closed control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n), it is possible for the player to terminate the synchronization period as appropriate. Even in the case where a redundant performance is realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in game entertainment due to the extended performance, and the width of the performance can be expanded.

  As a result of such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the bonus game (with the operation of the condition device is accompanied by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device). The state shifts to a state in which the operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the win is possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started as the process of step S804, and also indicates that the jackpot game has already been performed. The middle flag is operated (set) to the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

  That is, as will be described later, the jackpot start command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 84, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the peripheral control board 4140. Through the later-described control by the side, a display effect during the jackpot game is performed. Further, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started in the next and subsequent interrupt control by operating (setting) the big hit game flag in the ON state, such steps S801 to S804 are performed. Without performing the above process, the process from the following step S805 for performing the process related to the execution of the jackpot game is performed.

  In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is being opened. If it is open (YES in step S805), then as the processing in step S806, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2003 is set in the processing in step S606 (see FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the opened / closed operation limit time (predetermined long time or predetermined middle time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S806), the winning prize opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S808).

  However, even if it is determined in the processing of step S806 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet passed (NO in step S806), the same processing is performed after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), step S808 is performed. Then, the process proceeds to the above process and closes the special winning opening 2003. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S806), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S807), the big win game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S805 that the big prize opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is set in step S606 (FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times) set in the processing of (see) has been reached (step S809). If it has not reached (NO in step S809), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S810), and the big hit game processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S809 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of times, the big hit (the hit with the operation of the condition device) is made by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. Accordingly, the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 (big hit game) corresponding to the winning of the game will be disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S811 to step S817, so that the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 87), for example. The game state after the big hit game is set based on the winning type of the big hit, which is stored as a trigger for the execution of the big hit game, and then the big hit game process is terminated. Here, the winning type refers to whether or not the winning type activates the probability variation function or the short-time function. For example, when the big hit that is the trigger for the big hit game is the big hit C The content of the information about whether or not to activate the time-saving function depends on the gaming state when it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit.

  That is, first, the big hit flag and the big hit game flag are each set to the OFF state (step S811), and the winning type of the big hit that is triggered by the execution of the big hit game is determined (steps S812 and S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hit AD) that activates the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that the selected type that activates the probability variation function is not selected, the process proceeds to step S814 without operating the probability variation function. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S812 that the winning type activates the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to step S814. To do.

  Further, in the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not the winning type that activates the time-shortening function (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C won in the short-time gaming state). As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning species that activates the time reduction function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without operating the time reduction function (step S816), and when the processing flag is set to “0” (step S816). In step S817), the big hit game process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S814 that the winning type activates the time reduction function, the time reduction function is activated (step S815), and then the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S816). ), When the processing flag is set to “0” (step S817), the big hit game processing is terminated.

  According to such a jackpot game start process, until it is determined in step S807 that the round game has reached the maximum number of times, the big prize opening 2003 is opened according to the type of jackpot (step S806). In step S807 and step S809), the game is repeatedly released, and as a result, a player can obtain a winning ball according to the type of jackpot.

  Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 93, also in the small hit game processing (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first displays the small hit game indicating that the small hit game has already been performed as the processing of step S901. It is determined whether the in-game flag is in an ON state (set).

  Here, the small hit game flag is operated to be OFF when the small hit game process (step S250) is in progress and the processing status is immediately after. Accordingly, when the processing state is immediately after the transition to the small hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Perform the process.

  In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) has ended, that is, is determined in advance by the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 91). A determination is made as to whether or not the current time (here, 8 seconds) has expired. If the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not expired and the interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily terminated, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

  However, in the small hit game process (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big hit game process (step 240), as a result of such a process, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has timed out. In this case (YES in step S902), in order to start the small hit game only with this, next, as a process of step S903, a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started is set and the small hit game is started. The small hit gaming flag indicating that the game is already being performed is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, in this case, as long as the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closed control period does not appear (there is no extended control from the first closed control period having a certain length), the conditional device After completely removing the expectation that a bonus game may be performed according to the hit (big hit) with the operation of (not a notification by a production with a lot of false information, etc. It is possible to play a game (after removing the expectation by presence or absence).

  As will be described later, the small hitting start command set in step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. In the above, the display effect during the small hit game is performed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Further, by operating (setting) the small hit game flag in the ON state, when the small hit game process (step S250) is started in the subsequent interrupt process, such a step S902 is performed. Then, without performing the process of step S903, the process of the following step S904 for performing the process related to the execution of the small hit game is performed.

  In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then, as the processing in step S905, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2003 is set in the processing in step S701 (see FIG. 91). It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (a predetermined short time of the short time open / close pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S905), the winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2006 (step S907).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), the same processing is performed after the special winning opening 2003 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, two) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S906), the above step The process proceeds to S907 and the special winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S905), the small winning game process is terminated while maintaining the special winning opening 2003 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S904 that the big prize opening 2003 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 is determined in the process in step S701 (see FIG. 91). It is determined whether or not the set maximum number of times (two times) has been reached (step S908). If not reached (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the special winning opening 2003 (step S909), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S908 that the maximum number of times of opening of the big winning opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006 has been already performed, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag are turned off. The state is operated (step S910), and when the processing flag is set to “0” (step S911), the small hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a small winning game process, until it is determined in the process of step S906 that the opening / closing member 2006 has reached the maximum number of times the large winning opening 2003 has been opened, Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2003 as compared to the open mode, it is possible for a player to acquire a prize ball corresponding to the open mode. Become.

  Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 103 illustrates an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

  In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 97, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, an initial setting process is performed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every 2 ms. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until the 2 ms steady process is set (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), a 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In this 16 ms steady process, based on various production commands received from the main control board 4100, the LEDs of the decorative boards provided in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 Processing for controlling the speaker is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process described above (loop process).

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed effect command, the control (effect control process) related to the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a sound control process related to the sound output of the speaker for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect (step S1300). Furthermore, a light emission decoration control process related to light emission decoration by each decoration board provided in the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is executed (step S1400).

  After this, the information output for transmitting the commands (in addition to the display commands described later, sound output commands, light emission decoration commands, etc.) set in the above-described processes S1200 to S1400 to the lamp driving substrate and the liquid crystal control substrate. Processing is performed (step S1500). As a result, an effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frames, the decorative boards provided in the game board, and the like.

  After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is performed. The process ends.

  It should be noted that such processing in steps S1100 to S1600 (16 ms steady processing) is set as a processing amount that is completed within 16 ms, but it is assumed that when the time of 16 ms has elapsed from the start of 16 ms steady processing, the step is performed. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 has not been completed, the process in the above-described step S1600 is continued without changing back to the process in step S1100 (from the command analysis process). It will carry out to the processing of. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed by the 16 ms steady process to update the various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  Next, command analysis processing (processing in step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) first receives an effect command from the main control board 4100 as a received command of the peripheral control board 4140 in step S1101. It is determined whether or not it is stored in a storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives the effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processes such as the 16 ms steady process and generates a command reception interrupt process. In the embedding process, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. In the reception command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order in which the effect commands are received from the main control board 4100. In the command reception interrupt process, these effect commands are associated with the reception order. Each of these areas is memorized separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the reception command storage area. (Step S1102).

  Next, whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (a command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 97). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. At the time of setting (step S1104), the command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (command shown in FIG. 96) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is processed in step S411 (see FIG. 88). It is then determined whether or not the winning information command (the winning information command indicating the winning type including winning and winning points) is included in the effect command set on the main control board 4100 side ( Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), The command analysis process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the effect command received in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of peripheral control board 4140 is set. At the time of setting (step S1107), the command analysis process is terminated. In addition, as such an effect command, for example, a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 89), the step S606 (see FIG. 90), or the step S702. An interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of (see FIG. 91) and a big hit start set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S803 (see FIG. 92) There are a command and a small hitting start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the processing of step S903 (see FIG. 93).

  Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 100, this effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game, based on the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), and the big hit Any one of the display process (step S1230) and the small hit display process (step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is set. On the condition that the display is performed, a process for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, including the display of the decorative symbols. For example, a display effect pattern (decoration pattern stop pattern, presence / absence of the above-mentioned extended effect, etc.) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control board) In addition to setting the display command, settings related to the notice effect are also performed.

  Further, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1” basically corresponds to a fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99). On the condition that the flag is set, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 including the display of the decorative symbols is displayed (to the liquid crystal control board 4150) so that the result of the big win lottery is displayed. To set display commands, etc. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the confirmed stop command is reset.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the jackpot that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display indicating that the big prize opening 2003 is opened on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) Each control is performed. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  Also, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99). In addition, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays that the big winning opening 2003 is opened, or the effect display in the small hit gaming state is displayed. Control each. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the display effect at the time of big hit or small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. In the display effect after the extension, after extending to the period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display A case where the result of the jackpot lottery can be shown is provided.

  That is, in this case, as described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), an intermediate stage where the display stage in the liquid crystal display device 1400 has not ended has appeared even though the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set. The process will be terminated.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect thus extended is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). Processing to be performed continuously as a response to the contents to be processed. Therefore, in the process at the time of extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, the effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the big prize opening 2003 is opened) Never do.

  As described above, the command set in the processing of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control processing is transmitted to liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, a display effect of the content (such as a display effect pattern) indicated by the command appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board side.

  The effect control process also performs a touch panel process. In this touch panel process, the effect control process detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 246. This effect control process acquires the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point, and performs an operation including this initial position. Get information. In addition, this effect control process may acquire not only such a coordinate value but the range of a contact surface. Details of the touch panel processing will be described later.

  Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in an ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, based on the fact that a predetermined start condition (YES in step S 301) is established on the main control board 4100 side, the variation pattern is processed in the process of step S 1104 (see FIG. 99). It will wait for the reception flag to be turned on.

  Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to be in the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the control related to the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232), and when it is determined that the state is not the same, the display effect such as the previous symbol variation ends. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) for starting a demonstration effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1400. The display command thus set is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 99, so that the liquid crystal display apparatus 1400 performs a demonstration effect through control by the liquid crystal control board 4150 side. Will be executed.

  If it is not determined in step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol variation start process is temporarily terminated, and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221). Will wait until either condition is satisfied (YES in step S1236).

  Further, as a result of performing such processing (steps S1236 and S1237), when it is determined in the processing of step S1232 that the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (step S1232). In step S1233, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player with respect to the effect mode is permitted.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal The display effect in the display device 1400 is not terminated within the variation time of the variation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side, and a plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display A display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) that can be displayed as to whether or not a win (bonus) with the operation of the condition device has been won after being extended to the period after the variable display related to the lighting pattern is stopped ) And a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected.

  Here, an overview of the extended effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected when in the second effect mode will be described. 104 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 104 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit, and FIG. 104 (c). These are figures for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG.104 (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  In the first production mode, if the result of providing an opportunity to get a prize ball (bonus game) is obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006, the production is extended until the period after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. A display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) at the time of extension having contents can be selected.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the big hit, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). However, after that, even when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (when the special symbol changes) or the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (rushing into the opening period) is set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The production will be continued without ending.

  That is, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the special symbol is stopped during the closed control period from when the special symbol is stopped to when the big bonus game is started based on the fact that the big hit is won. A time (first closed control period having a predetermined length) until a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) is up by the interval effect timer, and an interval effect timer. Time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (see FIG. 151) after a predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) has expired (second closed control period having an indefinite length) To control as.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 104 (a). In addition, the amount of time for the special symbol to be changed is the amount of time (first closed control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. In such a way, the display effect for the big hit lottery is performed. Such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  Then, when the first closing control period having a fixed length has passed and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is controlled, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 Is switched to the winning clarification effect in which the winning information about whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a winning (big winning) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is specified. Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a big hit effect in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. It can be realized as an effect that reflects the appearance of winning the battle. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning effect that the result of the effect appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that the production contents are extended to the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closed control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. .

  After that, on the condition that the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, the game ball is launched relatively strongly as an effect within the second closing control period. Control is performed so that the opening effect before the big hit game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by urging that the big hit game should be started by playing the right hit game in which the game ball flows down to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 To do. As a result, when a right-handed game is performed by the player, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 passes through the effective gate 6010n, and thus a jackpot start command is set. It becomes. As a result, when the second closing control period ends, a big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (see FIG. 92). At this time, the round indicator 648 lights to indicate the number of rounds.

  Further, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends and a big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened (a flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, liquid crystal Even if the content of the production is in the middle of the production that is appearing on the display device 1400 (successful clarification production or opening production), during the big hit game indicating that the first round game has started This is done by forcibly switching to production. However, on the other hand, the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends as long as the game ball does not pass through the effective gate 6010n after the first closing control period having a certain length ends. Since the flag is not set (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is not set), it is not forcibly switched to the big hit game effect indicating that the first round game has started.

  According to such extended effect pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed since the special symbol stopped, at least if the operation handle portion 410 is not operated, the effective gate Since the game ball does not pass through 6010n, the progress of the performance continues to stagnate in the performance before the start of the big hit game (the performance during the second closed control period). That is, in this case, the player starts the operation by not operating the operation handle portion until he or she understands the meaning of the effect before the start of the big hit game (the effect during the second closed control period). It becomes possible to continue stagnating the production in the previous production. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle part, the effect before the start of the big hit game ends and proceeds to the next effect (effect during the big hit game). My pace production according to each player's pace will be realized, in other words, the sense of speed required for the progress of the production can be realized as a production adapted to a wide range of customers regardless of gender Become.

  Furthermore, in such an extended production pattern at the time of big hit, as long as the production is not progressed from the production before the big hit game is started (the stagnation control of the production by the peripheral control MPU 4150a), the main control MPU 4100a is indefinite. By controlling so that the second closed control period with the length of the game will not be terminated, the game progresses and a big hit game (bonus game in which a prize ball can be obtained) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's side, just adjusting the speed of the production to match the pace of the player, the game will appear to progress to match the adjusted production speed, As a result, the personal pace effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be enjoyed without worrying about the game progress speed.

  As described above, the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit is the second closed control period that appears in such a way that the closed control period is extended after the first closed control period having a certain length is completed. In the second closing control period, part of the contents of the effect (winning effect) and the opening effect before the big hit game (within the second closing control period) By making a right-handed game, an effect that prompts the user to start a big hit game) can be performed. Then, the second closed control period can be ended at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, and thus the big hit game can be started at an appropriate timing. A timer may be provided for the main control board so that the second closed control period is not extended more than necessary. The main control board can forcibly set the big hit start command when the specified time has elapsed after the first closed control period has ended. The main control board may determine by lottery whether or not to set a timer.

  However, on the other hand, the second closing control period is a period that ends at least when the operation handle 410 is operated (a period with an indefinite length). When a game is played so that the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length is finished, It is also possible to proceed quickly to the next production (production during the big hit game) without making the cut or the production itself appear almost (production skipping). In addition, as described above, when the performance is advanced early in this way, the game control itself proceeds quickly, and the big hit game is started at an earlier stage. Therefore, while realizing a personal pace effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a player such as a veteran can enjoy a quick game / production performance that is efficient and stress-free by making the game progress earlier by skipping the production. To be able to.

  In particular, the time required for the opening effect (game time) in which a game description that prompts a right strike is performed after the winning explicit effect (big hit effect) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. Often only time. However, according to the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit, if the time (game time) required for such an opening performance is prepared, but this only functions as a wasteful time for the player, this is appropriately set. The production and the game can be advanced more quickly. As a result, it is possible to provide each player with an effect and game suitable for each player.

  By the way, the production time (game) is also cut by reducing the production time (time of the win clarification production time) for showing the winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (hit the big game) with the operation of the condition device. If it is advanced earlier, the final performance result in the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit (for example, whether or not the character wins the battle) does not appear sufficiently, and even the opening performance is performed. There will be a big hit game production (round production etc.) suddenly appear. In other words, in this case, the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit will be terminated at an intermediate stage before the result of the production sufficiently appears, so that even the opening production can be omitted and the big hit game can be started early. Become.

  By the way, in the production within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a winning clarification production is performed in which it is clearly shown that the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device. After that, an opening effect that encourages the player to start the big hit game by performing a right-handed game is performed. However, after the opening effect is performed for a predetermined time (or while the opening effect is being performed), a special feature movie dedicated to the big hit may be played. According to the second closed control period having an indefinite length, even if such a redundant production is realized, the production delay does not cause a bad effect such as a decrease in game entertainment. Can be widened.

  In addition, in the second closing control period, an operation acceptance with respect to a predetermined operation means (operation button unit or the like) is permitted, and an expectation degree regarding the result of the game lottery is shown based on the operation of the button. It may be possible to perform an operation system effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the number of rounds of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game, etc.). That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation system effect that allows the player to operate at his / her own pace without worrying about the expiration date (operation acceptance is allowed). It becomes like this.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is turned on in the round indicator 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the time when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol is ended. It is controlled not to be performed. Then, after the first closed control period ends, the control is released on condition that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the round display is turned on. As a result, during the second closed control period, it is possible to perform a win-win effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the round display is turned off. Further, it is avoided that the number of rounds in the big hit game can be easily grasped by the player, regardless of how much stagnant effect occurs in the second closing control period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extended effect pattern at the time of small hit) is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, the special symbol is also displayed. The time that the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) expires after it is stopped (the first closed control period with a certain length) is extended with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Thus, a display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. Such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a state in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the closing control from when the special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the small hit is won until the game per small opening (small hit game) is started. The period (opening period) consists only of the time (first closed control period having a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. Is controlling. Therefore, in such an extended performance pattern at the time of a small hit, a first closing control period (here, 8 seconds) having a certain length has elapsed, and a game per small opening (small hit game) At the start, the contents of the effects appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are displayed on the winning clarification effects indicating whether or not the winning information is whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device. To switch to. Note that here, the winning clarification effect is performed as a losing effect in which it is clearly indicated that the result of the big hit lottery is a win lost in the condition device (actual hit) with the operation of the condition device. This can be realized as an effect that shows the appearance of defeat in the battle with the enemy character. In addition, in view of the fact that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning effect that the result of the effect appears, an extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment and Is an effect pattern in which the contents of the effect are extended to the period during which the small opening per game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the change of the special symbol is stopped. I can say that.

  According to the extended effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next change (special symbol hold-up) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. become. Furthermore, since the content of the production is extended to the period in which the game per small opening (small hit game) is performed, the liquid crystal is displayed during the execution period of the game per small opening (small hit game). The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is less likely to be noticed as much attention is paid to the display device 1400. That is, in this case, since the content of the effect proceeds in the same manner as when the so-called highly anticipated loss effect (the loss effect where the opening and closing member 2006 does not operate), the loss effect pattern with respect to the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit As a result, the pachinko machine 1 on which a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device is mounted is hardly noticed.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 is similar to or the same as that when the small opening per game (small hit game) corresponding to such a small hit is won. The big hit game that operates the opening / closing member 2006 with the above operation mode, the latent effect state based on this (the so-called latent effect state using the small hit), etc. are not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (see FIG. 104 (a)) in the first effect mode and the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit (see FIG. 104 (b)) are only equipped with a small hit. It was made based on the technical idea of making it difficult to grasp the pachinko machine 1 that has been used (technical idea opposite to the conventional one). In consideration of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closing control period, the opening of the big prize opening will also appear at the time of a big hit, the effect contents in each effect pattern are respectively extended. .

  In addition, in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit and the extended effect pattern at the time of the small hit according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 (a) and (b), the interval effect is produced after the special symbol is stopped. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device only after the time (first closing control period) until the timer (here 8 seconds) expires has passed Information is shown (actual presentation effect). However, with regard to these extended performance patterns, if the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of being extended to within the first closing control period, the display effects within the first closing control period are included. In the effect portion that appears, winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with operation of the condition device may be shown. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect relating to the next change (reservation of the special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is a big hit. Note that in this case, in the win-winning effect at the time of the big hit, an exclusive effect at the big hit that congratulates the character that it won the battle based on the fact that it has already been won, or a right strike is urged In addition to the effects for explaining the game, and in the demonstrating the win at the time of the small hit, the character is defeated by the battle and regrets that it is already known that the loss is a big hit A special effect at the time of a small hit will appear.

  As a result, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game) by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is provided in the second effect mode with respect to the extended effect pattern when in the first effect mode. In the case where it is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can select a challenge bonus effect pattern that indicates that the winning ball is won when winning is possible. The challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (winning type) as a win that can be obtained by winning the winning prize opening 2003.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected in the second effect mode based on the winning of the jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 4150a starts to change the special symbol. The display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to match (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  However, this display effect does not show the lottery result for winning the big hit, but wins when the opportunity to win a prize ball is granted by opening the big winning opening 2003 (big win or small win) It is shown whether or not it has been made (winning effect on the challenge bonus). More specifically, it indicates that when a big win or a small win is won, an opportunity for winning a prize ball is given by opening the big prize opening 2003 within a special symbol fluctuation period. A specific display image will appear. In this case, the player cannot know how many prize balls the player can acquire by opening the big prize opening 2003, but the player gets a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003. It becomes possible to grasp what is possible.

  After a specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the big hit) on the basis of the big prize opening 2003. A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus production about the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the game. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, the time until the interval effect timer (here 8 seconds) expires after the special symbol is stopped (the first closed control period having a certain length) has elapsed. After that, the game is started on the condition that the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n.

  Here, in the pre-start production for starting the challenge bonus production, the operation amount (right) of the operation handle portion is utilized by using the first closing control period until the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) times out. Aiming at the effective gate 6010n by hitting game) and the operation timing will be described.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment may perform a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 as such a pre-start effect. This countdown effect is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, for example, while explaining that the right gate game is aimed at the effective gate 6010n, and this countdown display is changed to “0” When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as soon as the first closing control period ends.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the setting of the big hit start command is relatively early after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired. As a result, the second closing control period is ended, and as a result, a challenge bonus presentation and a jackpot game (special bonus game) are started at an early stage as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player. Become so. At this time, the round indicator lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

  That is, according to such effect progress in the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (indefinite length) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires. Compared to the case of the challenge bonus performance pattern (see FIG. 104 (d)) at the time of a small hit, which will be described later, in which the second closed control period) having this time does not exist, this is ignored in terms of performance. It will be as short as possible. In other words, the above-described countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is terminated early to cut it, which will be described later. As in the case of the small bonus game pattern (see FIG. 104 (d)), only the first closed control period having a certain length appears as an interval period before the big game (before the challenge bonus effect). The game progresses in a form (progress of production). As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (type of hits) as winnings that can be won by opening the big prize opening 2003, and long-opening in the challenge bonus production In addition to winning games and games per middle opening, it is possible to perform an effect display regarding which game mode appears including games per small opening.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment is turned on in the round indicator 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the time when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol is ended. It is controlled not to be performed. Then, the round display 648 is turned on by releasing the control on condition that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n after the end of the first closed control period. Thereby, prior to the challenge bonus effect being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player wins the big win by turning on the round indicator 648 and the number of rounds in the big win game (special bonus game) is given to the player. It becomes possible to avoid being easily grasped.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display is changed to “0”, the time from when the game ball is launched until it passes through the effective gate 6010n is the following preceding effect (not shown). As a result, the time until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (second closing with an indefinite length) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired is filled. The existence of the control period) can be further concealed in terms of production.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to “0” is slightly earlier than the time at which the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up (first time) 1 within the closed control period 1). According to such a countdown effect, at least part of the time from when the game ball is fired by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is the first closed control period and the first Among the two closed control periods, the game is made possible so that it can be included as the time on the first closed control period side, and as a result, the second closed control period having an indefinite length is correspondingly increased. It can be shortened by (the amount included as the time on the first closing control period side). In this case, the preceding effect is also started in advance for the second closing control period, and as an effect that may straddle the first closing control period and the second closing control period. Will be positioned.

  Here, as a series of effect contents that lead from such a countdown effect to a challenge bonus effect through a preceding effect, for example: • In the countdown effect, “Countdown display is“ Attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing of "0"! ”And a challenge bonus effect indicating the result of the attack set is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n (the flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is set), etc. Can be realized.

  Also, as a challenge bonus effect, for example, as a result of the attack that was set up, when the attack on the enemy character was avoided, it indicated that it was a game per small opening, and although the attack hit the enemy character, it could not be defeated It can be realized by showing that it is a game per middle release, and showing that it is a game per long release when an enemy character falls due to an attack. Or, when an attack hits an enemy character but cannot be defeated, it indicates either a game per medium release or a game per long release. You may make it clearly indicate which is a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as an attack hits an enemy character, not only the amount of prize balls that can be earned but also the advantage to the player is eliminated as much as the possibility of a small hit is excluded. This also makes it possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation of transition to a new gaming state.

  However, in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, it is also assumed that the operation handle 410 may not be operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect changes to “0”. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 104 (d), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  Although the countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, it is not necessarily counted as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the operation handle portion should be operated can be grasped. Good.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not A display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start of variation of the symbol (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect thus started is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the variation of the special symbol.

  Similarly, even in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, in such an effect (a winning effect related to the challenge bonus) performed during the special symbol change period, a prize ball is obtained by opening the grand prize opening 2003. A specific display image appears showing that an opportunity for acquisition is given. As a result, the player can not know how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the grand prize opening 2003, but can obtain a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003 It becomes possible to grasp what is said.

  In addition, after a specific display image appears in the winning effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of a small hit) is set. A pre-start production is performed to start a challenge bonus production about how many prize balls the player can acquire by opening the big prize opening 2003.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. Until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires (first closed control period having a certain length), and when the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n A game per small opening (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through (see FIG. 83).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment, in the small bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation of the operation handle (passing of the game ball to the valid gate 6010n) is essentially a game or effect. Although it is not necessary, as the pre-start production to start the challenge bonus production, the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up as in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus production pattern at the big hit. Using the first closing control period, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle 410 is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be performed.

  According to the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of small hits When the operation handle part is operated as instructed by the same effect, the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of big hits leads from the countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect The challenge bonus production is started with the same series of production contents. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (type of hits) as winnings that can be won by opening the big prize opening 2003, and long-opening in the challenge bonus production It is possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode appears including not only winning games and games per middle opening but also games per small opening.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the countdown display is “ It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the operation handle portion is not operated for a long time after changing to “0”. In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to the present embodiment starts the false effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the countdown display changes to “0”, and starts the false effect on the preceding effect. When the provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the challenge bonus effect is also controlled to start false.

  In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the challenge bonus effect from the countdown effect through the preceding effect, regardless of whether or not the operation system effect requiring an operation on the operation handle portion is performed. A series of production contents that lead to a false appearance (false production). Therefore, the player precedes the surrounding field horses who want to check the liquid crystal display device 1400 by confirming whether or not the operation handle portion is operated or whether or not the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. It is possible to grasp that a game is played per small opening, and this makes it possible to show an intelligent act such as immediately suspending the game.

  Thus, as described above, the extended production pattern in the first production mode is the existence of the small hitting itself by continuing the second closed control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time. It is a production pattern aimed at concealment, and after extending the production content to the first closed control period with a certain length that also exists in the production pattern at the time of small hit, In the second closed control period that cannot exist in the effect pattern, the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect that prompts the player to start the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat the small hit as one of the hits by preventing the second closed control period having an indefinite length from appearing as much as possible. This is a rendition pattern that has a certain length that is also present in the effect pattern at the time of a small hit, as an opening effect before a big hit game (an effect that prompts the player to start a big hit game by playing a right-handed game) This is performed so as to be completed within the first closed control period.

  Such an effect based on the premise that a second closed control period having an indefinite length exists due to the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the production structure in which the timing for promoting the right-handed game within the second closed control period is different), even if the display production pattern based on one production command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), It is possible to greatly vary the length of the production time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decoration symbol) to the start of the big hit game between the first production mode and the second production mode. Thus, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effect contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  By the way, according to such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 104 (c)) and a small hit challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 104 (d)), the hit display effect (specific When a display image appears, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is provided so that at least a specific number of prize balls (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. Once the player knows what will be done, it will be performed as a challenge bonus effect with a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be accumulated as a bonus .

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that the winning probability (1/400) with the operation of the condition device is added to the winning probability (3/400) with no operation of the condition device. With (1/100), not only that the prize ball can be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but that the game state can be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. Can also be made aware. As a result, it is avoided that only a monotonous losing effect is repeatedly displayed due to the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, and the decline in the game entertainment is suppressed. .

  In addition, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even when the big win is lost, when the specific condition is satisfied, the display effect (specific display image) at the time of winning appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Despite the fact that the player can be conscious of the fact that the player can pay out a prize ball and that the player changes to an advantageous gaming state, A specific image that does not appear when winning (such as an image that appears when a false effect such as a preceding effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed even though there is no operation on the operation handle) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I am doing so. In other words, in this case, until the special winning opening 2003 is opened according to the winning of the big hit, it can also function as a waiting effect period whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player as well as no change to the gaming state advantageous to the player is also the same image (false effect). Since it will be possible to obtain significantly less prize balls than when no appears, this indicates that the big hit was won, combined with the size of the gap of the profit that the player can obtain It is possible to further enhance the game entertainment when an effect (stagnation effect from the first closed control period) appears.

  And according to the structure by which such two production modes are employ | adopted, in the 1st production mode which can select an extended production pattern, when performing the game per small opening (small hit game), with respect to a player In the second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, while an effect that does not make the player aware of that the winning ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates) is small. When the game per opening (small hit game) is executed, an effect can be provided that makes the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates). . As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, a higher probability (a smaller winning hit probability “1/400” is smaller than in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected). With the higher probability “1/100)”, which is the winning probability of winning “3/400”, an effect that makes the player aware that a prize ball can be paid out appears. The probability of executing a bonus game (opening of the big prize opening 2003 by the opening and closing member 2006) in which a prize ball can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the game state accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It will be possible to achieve a deeper effect as if changes in each time. In addition, in the second production mode, the player can hardly realize that such a production is the pachinko machine 1 in which the small hit is mounted in the first production mode. This is because a display effect is provided in which not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one kind of hits where winning balls can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. Mode compulsory control means for creating a mode compulsory period that is forcibly determined to any one of the effect modes and that is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the compulsory determined effect mode is provided.

  For example, a first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the first effect mode. The second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the period until a predetermined date such as the next one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode. When the control related to the creation of the mode compulsory period is performed, an effect is performed so as to conceal the fact that the small hits are mounted as described above for the first month. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 that can pay out a prize ball to a player with a winning probability. On the other hand, during the next month, the effect that the small hit is treated as one type of winning that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed, so that the winning probability of the big win is exceeded. The pachinko machine 1 which can be paid out to a player with a high probability can be operated as a pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with only one game specification. In combination with the fact that it was difficult to notice the presence of small hits during the period, it seems as if another pachinko machine with different game specifications for obtaining the ball as well as the production contents on the liquid crystal display device 1400 was newly operated. Will be able to give the player a unique impression. After the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation on the operation means during the demonstration effect.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 101, in the processing of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs the first rendering mode and the second rendering based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not it is in a mode compulsory period that is compulsorily determined as one of the effect modes. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), the second production is performed. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is not allowed (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), the process waits for the variation pattern reception flag to be set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, based on the time information such as the calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa, it is determined that the mode is not in the mode compulsory period forcibly determined as one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode. When it is performed (for example, when the second predetermined period has already elapsed), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is permitted (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234 Perform the process.

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode. Here, the player's operation is, for example, an operation on an operation button unit or a sub button. When the main button or the sub button is operated while the demonstration effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 It is conceivable to perform display control for causing the selection screen for the production mode to appear. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, when a specific effect mode is selected by an operation on the sub button 372, and the selected specific effect mode is determined by an operation on the main button, the effect mode It is determined that there has been an operation by the player to change the game (YES in step S1234), and setting processing related to the production mode is performed to change to the decided production mode (step S1235).

  Note that the means to be operated by the player may not be the main button or the sub button of the operation button unit, and may be a predetermined operation by the player including a proximity operation using a touch panel. That's fine. In addition, as a process when an operation is performed by the player, in addition to control that causes a change in display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (appearance of selection screen, display at the time of selection, display at the time of determination, etc.), for example, transmission The player is informed that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 600 having the characteristics (change from blue to red, etc.). Alternatively, it may be shown.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is established, the following steps S1222 to S1227 for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are performed.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, on this basis, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (step S1223). The game state flag is operated to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

  Then, when the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (YES in step S1223), next as the process of step S1224, the setting state of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa Based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information, it is determined whether or not the first production mode is set. As a result, when the first production mode is forcibly determined or when the first production mode is set in a period in which the change of the production mode by the player's operation is allowed Then, it is determined that the first production mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

  In the processing of step S1225a, the change display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is stored with reference to the effect pattern table when the first effect mode is set. Based on the information regarding the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined.

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, when the first production mode and the second production mode are used, the notice pattern execution frequency and the contents of the production of the notice effect change in addition to the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the selection process, in the notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the first effect mode thus determined are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 98, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set in a period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined or in a period in which the effect mode can be changed by the player's operation. If it is in the state, it is determined that the first effect mode is not set (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, the change display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) is stored with reference to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. Based on the information regarding the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined. Next, in the notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect) related to the notice effect based on an appropriate notice determination random number, including the determination as to whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process for determining the pattern is executed (step S1226b).

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the second effect mode determined in this way are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 98, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the liquid crystal and sound control. Through the control by the unit 4160 side, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1223 that the game state flag does not indicate that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (NO in step S1223), the detailed description is omitted, but the current game state An effect pattern and a stop symbol are determined based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), and an appropriate advance notice is included in the notice effect table corresponding to the current gaming state, including whether or not to execute the notice effect. A notice selection process in which an effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on the determination random number is executed (step S1230).

  Then, a display command (preliminary command) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern corresponding to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 98, so that the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side. Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is read, and the variation pattern command is read. The associated production pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 108 and 109). Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 105 and 106). When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, with respect to the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the case where the above-mentioned extended effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped is adopted (confirmed). It will stop (based on the stop command being set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an “extended effect pattern” and an “effect that is not an extended effect pattern but can be prepared as a pair of the extended effect pattern” can be prepared. A determination is made as to whether any of the production patterns “losing production pattern” has been determined in step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any one of the production patterns is determined, when a predetermined stop pattern at the time of extension (a specific reach lose symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), step S1225a (FIG. 101) is determined. The processing of (see) is terminated. That is, in this case, during the opening period, the contents of the display effect centering on the story such as the character are extended (developed) in a state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the extended stop symbols. It will continue to appear, after which the result of whether or not you won the jackpot will be clearly stated.

  On the other hand, a normal production pattern that is different from any of the production patterns of “extended production pattern” and “losing production pattern that is not an extended production pattern but can be prepared as a production of a pair of the extended production pattern” (FIG. 105 (c) (see FIG. 108), the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big win lottery indicated by the winning information command is determined through the processing of step S1304 to step S1310.

  That is, first, based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 99), it is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. The stop symbol dedicated to the small hit time is determined (step S1307). However, in the first effect mode, since the effect commands are all associated with the extended effect pattern so that the presence of the small hit is concealed, the processing in step S1306 is always performed. Then, it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and next, as a process of step S1308, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a display effect (high expectation loss effect) in which reach is formed.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, when the stop symbol of reach loss is determined (step S1309), the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated, whereas reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated when the irregular stop symbols that do not form reach are determined (step S1310).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is read, and the variation pattern command is read. The associated production pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. It may be. When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, for the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, when a lottery result that enables winning balls is obtained, the special symbols are adjusted to stop changing ( The stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hit is stopped (based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, the big hit is based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the processing of step S1106 (see FIG. 97). Judgment is made as to whether or not the lottery result is a hit (big hit or small win) at which a winning ball can be obtained (steps S1322 and S1324). As a result, when the result of the big win lottery is a win (a big hit or a small win) where a winning ball can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is confirmed. When the bonus challenge stop symbol that can be grasped is determined (step S1323), the processing of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated. The bonus challenge stop symbol is realized by, for example, a special symbol that does not become a component of the jackpot symbol combination appearing during the change, and the special symbol combination included in the symbol combination at the time of stop, etc. can do.

  In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. Round lottery elements such as how many prize balls can be added as bonuses after the player knows that the opportunity to get prize balls will be provided There will be a challenge bonus performance.

  On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is not a hit (big hit or small win) in which a winning ball can be obtained (NO in both the processes of step S1322 and step S1324), the process of step S1325 is performed next. A determination is made as to whether or not the display effect is a reach.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, when the reach loss stop symbol is determined (step S1326), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated, whereas reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated when the irregular stop symbols that do not form reach are determined (step S1327).

  Hereinafter, an example of a display effect that appears when such various processes (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment are performed will be described. FIG. 105 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 96 is based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not can be made successful (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is in a situation where the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta1 has arrived. The display effect a is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission a to succeed or fail).

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time period fluctuating Ta1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss when extending. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, since a display effect a (not developed, lost), which will be described later, associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. 96 is prepared, the display effect a even when the timing t1 has elapsed. This will function as “development display effect a (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission a)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect a” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being maintained in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after the final stoppage. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (the effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is hardly noticed such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the display effect a. However, the player can grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission a in the display effect a can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design (to display the result by the character). More desirable.

  In other words, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, the actual effect is not displayed in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped. However, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has succeeded (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such an expectation. Under the circumstances, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, a time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a situation in which the character A again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission a can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect a (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command “02H”. And, as described above, when the player is in the first effect mode, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reserved digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, a specific period of time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. The state of success in mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and an effect on whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (character A attacks the enemy and succeeds) Only the production). As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect a can appear in a manner indicating that the specific mission a has been successful after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, and is associated with the effect command “01H”. The display effect pattern that is displayed functions as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  However, as described above, in the extended performance pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. Two closing control periods appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect a) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n (timing tx), the second closing control period As a result, the jackpot game and the performance during the jackpot game are started. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 104A, the second closing control period from the timing t2 to the timing tx is ended based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Therefore, for example, as soon as the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the effective gate 6010n is moved to the game ball by operating the operation handle portion 410. When the game is played so that the game passes, the big hit explicit production a and the opening production are cut at that time, or the production itself is almost not appeared (the production is skipped), and the next production (the production during the big hit game) is forced. It will be progressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), FIG. 96 is based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, assuming that the variation relating to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 5 (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the variation time Ta1) is started (timing t0). , A display effect a at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy)) The dynamic display of the extended production pattern with contents is started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is also an extended effect pattern (see FIG. 105A) associated with the effect command “01H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not finished (the specific mission a is not succeeded or failed) ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”. Further, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “01H” (FIG. 105) is also the point of finalizing and stopping at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). Note that the lost stop mode at the time of extension is a single display mode regardless of the big win lottery results for the big hit and the small win, and the display mode is distinguished. Has not been.

  Furthermore, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for a, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 10A) associated with the effect command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, Actually, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, such an expectation that the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successful (for example, a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy has risen) is expected. Under the feeling, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, for example, the state until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used, for example, a state in which the character A faces the enemy again is displayed. An effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful is performed.

  Furthermore, in the same manner, until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives, there is no indication that the specific mission a has been successful (the character A defeats the enemy). An effect about whether the mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether the character A attacks the enemy and succeeds). However, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “02H” In this way, the losing explicit production a appears in the form of the failure of the mission a. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  For example, the loss explicit effect a is performed as a big hit defeat effect, for example, the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A is disappointed.

  According to the extended production pattern associated with such production commands “01H” and “02H”, the opening end timing t3 of the special winning opening 2003 from the special symbol start timing t0 (or the second closing control period). The time until the jackpot explicit presentation a ends) will function as one presentation for winning the jackpot, so the player's gaze can be directed to such a stage, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 when the losing explicit effect a is being performed, and thus the small hit.

  In order to obtain these functions and effects, no information can be obtained even if the player confirms that the grand prize opening 2003 is open (an event that may be a reason for confirming the opening). It is important that the configuration is excluded. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the big hit game that opens the big winning opening 2003 with the same or approximate opening manner as the game per small opening (small hit game) can be executed, by confirming the opening, Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game, that the player has won a big hit with a few hits that do not match the low winning probability of the big hit, so pay attention to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 It may also be a cause that

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither a big hit nor a small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the time of timing t0 to t1). If it is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” (for example, whether the specific mission a can be successful (character A) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is displayed when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped as the change time Ta3 elapses. This is completed without extending the production a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”. In addition, even when the decorative symbol changes, when the special symbol variation is stopped at the timing t1 when the special symbol variation is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extended loss stop mode. ing. As for the loss stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode appears at the time of big hit, at the time of small hit, and at the time of the loss.

  Further, the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension, and until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the passage of the variation time Ta3. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 105A and 105B) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character A who has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown), and the player is made aware that the specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 105 (a), 105 (b), and 105 (d) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development. become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither a big hit nor a small hit (pure) Based on the fact that the loss is obtained, the fluctuation is applied to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” (for example, whether a specific mission a can be successful (character The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having contents such as whether or not A can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is the non-extended display effect pattern, but when the effect commands are “01H” to “03H”. Even if the timing t1 has arrived due to the elapse of the special symbol fluctuation times ta1 to ta3, the display effect a is not ended (successful or unsuccessful for the specific mission a). . Furthermore, in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern (effect command “04H”), the decoration symbol change is started, but this decoration symbol change is also continued without being terminated at the timing t1. It has become.

  That is, in the case of loss (pure loss), unlike the case of big win or small win, not only the time required for opening control of the big winning opening 2003 but also maintaining it in the closed state prior to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. Since the first closing control period is immediately prepared and the next change is made immediately, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the change time of the special symbol.

  In this regard, with respect to the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command “04H”, the main control MPU 4100a, from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of a small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2003. It is prepared to be adopted when a variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to the time is selected as a reference. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a display effect a. However, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, but the display effect has a longer time.

  In other words, in this case, regarding the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the variation of any of them is not fixed and stopped at the timing t1 with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension. As in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the extension time at the stage before the passage of the timing t1, which is only an intermediate stage with respect to the change time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the lost stop mode. Then, whether or not the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 is reached while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. A continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. It should be noted that the loss stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even though the lottery result and the variation time of the big hit are different between the big hit, the small hit and the lost (pure loss). The mode is adopted, and the display mode is not distinguished.

  And, in this way, the continuation expectation production was successful with the decorative symbol temporarily suspended (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation. The “development display effect a” appears. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuation state again, and the display effect a is applied to the display effect a as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”. In the liquid crystal display device 1400, in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to pay attention to, such as an end portion of the display area), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a stopped state (when it is “01H” to “03H”, temporarily stopped when it is “04H”). Stop) is maintained until timing t2.

  In this “development display effect a”, for example, an appearance as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful, such as the appearance of the character A again facing the enemy within the time of the fluctuation time Ta4, is shown. Done. However, as in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the state in which the specific mission “a” has been successful (the character A is the enemy) until the timing t2 comes. No effect is shown, and only an effect about whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether Character A attacks an enemy and succeeds) appears. ing.

  After the timing t2, the state where the specific mission a has failed is shown until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “02H”. Lost explicit production a will appear in the form shown. As with the effect command “02H”, the losing explicit effect “a” is a big hit such as, for example, the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes and then the character A regrets. This is done as a defeat. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as “a loss effect pattern of effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  In this way, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, a specific lose effect pattern (effect command “ 04H "), when the specific control time (change time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined specific control time (change time Ta4). Display control relating to a specific loss production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. Nonetheless, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a win, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, with respect to the specific lose effect pattern (effect command “04H”). When performing display control related to all winning effect patterns (effect command “01H”), the main control MPU 4100a side determines a variation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific variation time (variation time Ta4). When setting the effect time, not only the determined short fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closing control period, second closing control period) is set. In such a production time, display control for a specific hit production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. It was.

  According to such an effect technique, even in a predetermined interval period after the special symbol is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the winning effect as to whether or not the winning is won and the opening effect. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut so that the effects and games can be advanced, so that it is possible to realize the effect progress (game progress) with a good tempo. In addition, when a display effect pattern of such specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a notable effect element is added to the point of whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle stage, When the stoppage is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is given, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, by providing the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” with respect to the extended effect pattern for the effect commands “01H” and “02H”, the “development display effect a” is obtained. The big hit expectation degree when it appears is avoided to have to be set within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, and the small hit is installed Even under such an effect system that makes it difficult to recognize this, it is possible to perform an effect design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, since the special symbol fluctuates after timing t1, there is no problem even when the player confirms the variation state of the special symbol. Absent. And by providing such a non-extension effect pattern in the form of mixing with the above-mentioned extension effect pattern, even if the special symbol stop state in the extension effect pattern is confirmed, It will be possible to promote awareness that might be mistaken.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, the big prize opening 2003 is not opened when the losing explicit effect a is being performed, and therefore, when the player confirms the big prize opening 2003. There is no problem even if it exists. Then, by providing such a non-open losing explicit effect a with the lost explicit effect a at the time of the effect command “02H”, the large winning opening 2003 is opened in the losing explicit effect a. Even if this is confirmed, it is possible to encourage the player to be aware of a mistake that may be mistaken.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “01H”, “02H”, and “04H”, a specific mission a is required until the timing t2 arrives. (Whether or not the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of the timing t2, whether or not the specific mission a is successful (the character A Whether or not to defeat the enemy) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even with such an effect method, the small win time display effect a In addition to the fact that most of the first closing control period is used for the display effect a, after that, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of character A appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such display effects appear when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such game performance (rendering performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. The winning commands 2003 by winning the small hits in spite of the contents of the directing commands “01H” to “04H” from the side, as well as the normal external disadvantaged gaming state. By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content on the premise of opening the game, the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 compared to when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if is greatly increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, it is shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect a ′ at the big hit time associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect a in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to make a specific mission a ′ successful? In the form of the display effect pattern (challenge), such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2003 is confirmed to be open. Bonus performance pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and a big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, the display pattern of the decorative symbols is made different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, whereas the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly composed of characters. In the second effect mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more likely to be noticed.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to be displayed appears, and at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the winning ball 2003 can be opened to obtain a prize ball. In order to make it possible for the player to grasp the fact that the bonus challenge has been stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period, and the player is released by opening the big prize opening 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect regarding how many prize balls can be acquired, a countdown effect a ′ in which the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 is indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is used. Like to do.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect a ′ is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed by a right-handed game. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the end of the first closing control period. .

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a ′, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, as shown in FIG. 105A, the end timing t2 of the first closing control period. As soon as the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n after the arrival of, the end timing tx of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the first production mode. Thereby, a challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which open mode (game per long opening, game per middle opening, game per small opening) is used to open the big prize opening 2003. That is, in this case, the player will not only play the big hit game but also play the game ball to the big prize opening 2003 not only when the game is per small opening (small hit game), thereby being in the first production mode. Compared to the above, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is continued for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a ′ changes to “0”. It is also assumed that a situation occurs in which the handle portion is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where a big win is won. In the case of FIG. 104 (d) and FIG. 105 (b), this cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 5 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “02H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. At the timing t1 when the display effect a ′ having a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the winning ball can be acquired by opening the winning opening 2003. It becomes. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. Until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires (first closed control period having a certain length), and when the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n Regardless of whether or not a game ball has passed through, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 93).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “02H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”. When the game is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect regarding whether it is a thing or not, a countdown effect a ′ in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as the big winning opening 2003 is opened, and the variation of the decorative design is started. There is no distinction in the contents of the stage from the timing t0 until the challenge bonus stage is performed, and when the operation handle part is operated as instructed for the stage, the challenge bonus is passed from the countdown stage a 'through the preceding stage (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “01H”). Accordingly, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by winning the big prize opening 2003. In addition to games and games per mid-open, it is possible to display effects regarding which game modes appear, including games per small open. Thereby, as compared with the case in the first production mode, the game performance (production performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not the winning is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

  In this way, the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but the small hit is regarded as a no-chance loss that does not give an opportunity to win a prize ball ( The extended production pattern in the first production mode to be handled (similar to the production pattern (production command “04H”) at the time of pure loss) This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns (challenge bonus effect patterns) in the second effect mode to be handled (similar to the effect pattern at the time of big hit (effect command “01H”)). . In other words, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, and thereby, a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents can be obtained without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

  Furthermore, the game per small opening (small game) means that only a small amount of award balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege. Since the game state is not shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed, the gaming interest is reduced even though the opening / closing member 2006 is operated. It can be said that it is necessary to pay attention to the handling in the game setting in that point. Therefore, in the past, when a small hit is installed, a special hit function is performed in which a big hit game is played with a behavior similar to that of a small open per game (small hit game) and thereafter, a transition is made to an advantageous gaming state. First of all, the winning type is prepared, and in the situation where a game per small opening (small winning game) is performed, the player is made aware of the possibility of being a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type Therefore, it has been a major premise to maintain the game entertainment at the time of a small opening game (small hit game). However, even in the case of such a conventional gaming machine, when a specific winning type is won, it is finally won in the big win with a big win probability set in a very low game state. Regardless of this, it is inevitable that there will be a decline in the game entertainment interest (decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the gap between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot) due to the fact that prize balls corresponding to this low probability cannot be obtained. It was.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is configured so that when hitting a small hit, a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and thereafter an advantageous gaming state In the first place, the technical philosophy is different from the conventional gaming machine in order to suppress the decline of the game entertainment at the time of the game per small opening (small winning game) in that the specific winning species that function to shift to It is very different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the small hits are mounted, the winning type of the big hit (big hit) so that a plurality of types of big hit games having different prize balls can be obtained by the player can be executed. A, jackpots B to E) are prepared. When opening the big prize opening 2003, first, the lottery result that the opening of the big prize opening 2003 is confirmed in the big hit lottery (a big hit A where a large amount of outgoings are expected to be obtained, and a medium amount of outgoings is expected) Display effect on whether or not a big hit B ~ E, a small hit that is expected to get a small amount of balls) is obtained (a challenge bonus effect pattern appears regardless of the type of hit) I have to). And as a result, when it is shown that the same lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to know that at least a small amount of balls are available. Then, there will be a further challenge bonus effect on how many balls can be added (from a small amount to a medium or large amount). Like that.

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). In this respect, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are stacked (a big hit A that is expected to obtain a large amount of balls, or a big hit BE that is expected to obtain a medium amount of balls), The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function (probability of transition to a gaming state in which the probability variation function operates) is made different. In other words, in this case, a challenge as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes appears so that the probability of changing to a gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated after the completion of the special winning opening 2003 is different. It will function as a bonus performance. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that a winning probability “3/400” without operation of the condition device is added to a winning probability “1/400” with operation of the condition device. With “1/100”, not only can a prize ball be paid out to a player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also that a game state advantageous to the player can be entered. Can also be made aware.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when it is stacked until it is possible to obtain a large amount of balls (probability expectation at the time of big hit A) is 100%, and at least medium Expectation for operation of the probability variation function when it is stacked until it is possible to acquire a large amount of balls (expected probability when jacking A to E) is 82%, and it is possible to acquire a medium amount of balls The expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when stacked up until it is assumed (probability expectation at the time of big hit BE) is 61.7%, and there are many expected values of the number of balls that can be obtained The more likely you are in the situation, the higher the expected probability of change.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus production, since it is positioned as a default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, there is a large amount of ball winning according to the winning of the big hit Unlike conventional gaming machines where whether or not a basic game (basic production) is used, even if a small opening per game (small hit game) where a small amount of balls can be obtained is performed, Since the grand prize opening 2003 is only opened in conformity with the default performance state, a decrease in the game entertainment is suppressed. In addition, when in the second production mode, the probability of appearance of the hit production (probability of entering the challenge bonus) is determined by the fact that a small amount of balls can be obtained is positioned as the default production state. ) Is set to a higher probability (higher probability of winning big wins plus higher probability of winning big hits), and as a result, it is not possible to acquire award balls corresponding to the lower probability. It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

  And in order to be able to have the challenge bonus performance pattern that realizes such games and performance in the second performance mode, not only is the lottery for the small hits performed in the first performance mode, At the time of winning a small hit, the varying times Ta2 to Td2 of the length corresponding to the changing times Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, a small win is not originally required, and a display effect as to whether or not a big hit has been won is basically performed based on the big win probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that is not easily noticed by the player if it is a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a special symbol variation. If the production method that shows the result of the big hit lottery at the time of the stop is simply adopted, after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period when the game per small opening (small hit game) is executed or the opening period of the big prize opening 2003 thereafter The existence of the game will be conspicuous, and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, at the timing t1 (at the end of the variation of the special symbol) when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set. However, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended and is continued. Further, when entering the first closing control period, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at the timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicates that the special winning opening 2003 is opened. The set of the command is ignored without switching to the interval effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. When the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts at timing t2, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It is executed in such a manner that it is switched to a winning clarification effect indicating whether or not (hit a big hit), and an opening effect.

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as one effect that appears at the time of the loss of the big hit, and after the special symbol is stopped, the first closing at the time of executing the game per small opening (small hit game) By performing it over the control period and the opening period of the subsequent grand prize opening 2003, the display effect on the next change (special symbol hold-up) relatively quickly after showing that it is a big win. Will be able to migrate to. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, because the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called highly anticipated loss production. This makes it difficult to notice, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interests due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating in accordance with the winning of the small hit.

  And in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment is in particular the first effect mode as described above. And a mode forcing control means for creating a mode forcing period that is forcibly determined to be one of the effect modes of the second and the second effect modes and is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode. ing. Then, a first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined as the first production mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the control related to the creation of the mode forcing period is performed so that the second predetermined period (for example, the next one month) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, the hall side conceals this from the player even though the small hits are mounted by the appearance of the extended effect pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. In addition, by performing win display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the basis of the jackpot winning probability “1/400”, a prize ball is awarded to the player with the jackpot winning probability “1/400”. The first game-specific pachinko machine that can be paid out can be started (first newly opened store). In addition, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses in this way, not only the big hit but also the small hit is one kind as a hit where the winning ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2003. The above-mentioned challenge bonus performance pattern to be dealt with is higher than the winning probability “1/400” in the first predetermined period, coupled with the fact that it is difficult to notice the presence of the small hit in the first predetermined period. Based on the probability “1/100”, the winning display is performed in the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in this case, a prize ball can be paid out to the player with a higher probability “1/100” obtained by adding the winning probability “3/400” of the big hit to the winning probability “1/400” of the big hit. The operation of a new pachinko machine with a second game specification can be started (second new store opening). As a result, while the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine that has not only the contents of the effects on the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the game specifications related to the appearance of the game is newly operated. Such an impression can be given to the player.

  Furthermore, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless a predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and it is determined that it is at a specific date (second predetermined period). The change control from the first production mode is not permitted, and some production modes (second production mode) of the plurality of production modes are still hidden without appearing. Will be performed. In other words, in this case, as the month and day have passed since the pachinko machine 1 was delivered to the hall, the production functions that were hidden until then were gradually exposed. Since the rendered performance function can be selectively used by the player's operation, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that it is set to the same time as the time of timing t0 to t1). When started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. Then, a display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggling by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) Accordingly, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “03H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a at the time of the big hit in which the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a deviation in the production time at, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production a at the time of big hit, and the contents of the display production a develop. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “01H” is “non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern). ) ”, There is no deviation in the production time with the same production pattern (production command“ 01H ”), and the production pattern (production command“ 01H ") will function as an effect pattern at the time of losing (an effect pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hit at the effect command “02H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line) appears, the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined symbol) for this effect pattern (effect command “02H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither a big hit nor a small hit (pure net). Based on the fact that the loss is obtained, the fluctuation is applied to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 dynamically displays a non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H”. Is started.

  That is, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H” has the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit when the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “03H” is in the first effect mode. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the effect pattern (effect command “01H”), this (effect pattern at the time of losing when in the first effect mode) should be compensated. It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” is the “non-extension effect pattern” when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H”. The production time with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit (the production command “01H”) will be shifted, and the production with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit It cannot function as an effect pattern when the pattern is lost.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” and the fluctuation time Tc2 when the fluctuation number is “10” shown in FIG. In this case, the variation time having the same length as the variation time Ta4 is prepared. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, a display effect pattern described later (see FIG. 106A) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” is “non-display”. Since it appears as an “extended display effect pattern”, there is no deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command “09H”). Therefore, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” is displayed. By starting the dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus) at the time of the loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern that does not appear on a predetermined symbol line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started, for example, such a decorative pattern is displayed at the variation time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ appears with a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” appears when a specific loss variation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It is possible to function as each display display pattern for the big hit display effect patterns of the two types of effect contents a and c ′, and functions as a display display effect pattern for any of the big hit display effect patterns. Whether to do this is selectively set based on whether the first effect mode or the second effect mode is set. As a result, for the two big hit effect commands “01H” and “09H”, the big hit effect commands “01H” are in the first production mode and in the second production mode. , The appearance probability of the loss display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of “09H” can be changed.

  More specifically, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the lose effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. In addition, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, various display effects patterns with different degrees of expectation can appear according to the effect modes without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step (see FIG. 107).

  The reason why such a special effect can be realized is that an effect command in which the length of each effect is adjusted by using the special symbol stop timing t3 as the effect time for one loss variation time Ta4. While having a big hit effect pattern of “09H” and a variation time Ta1 shorter than the loss variation time Ta4, at least the first closed control period after symbol stoppage is added and used as the effect time. A jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the effect command “01H” in which the length of the command is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the big hit effect pattern with the effect time adjusted in this way, one hit change time Ta4 is associated with the big hit effect patterns of the change commands “01H” and “09H” having different change times Ta1 and Tc1. When this loss variation time Ta4 is selected, it becomes possible to determine which production contents a and c ′ appear on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side. Furthermore, even when such a first closing control period added as the production time is won for winning the big winning opening 2003 (big hit or small win), a fixed length regardless of the type. It is important to set the time (for example, 8 seconds) with such a length in order to realize such a special effect especially including an effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 106 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 96 is based on the fact that the big win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect c (for example, a specific mission c) associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not can be made successful (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc1 has arrived. The display effect c is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission c to succeed or fail).

  That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” shown in FIG. 96 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 when the fluctuation number is “4”. However, when the first production mode is set, such an “extended production pattern” is adopted, and the production time with the production pattern (production command “04H”) is shifted. Is to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the first production mode, production relevance (big hit production pattern, loss production) with the display production pattern when the variation number is “4”. Pattern) is not given.

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the stoppage of the special symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, when the decoration symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Tc1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, since the display effect c (development not made, lost) described later associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. This will function as “development display effect c (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission c)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect c” appears, the special symbol is not seen from the player side even though it is in the first closed control period after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. It can be grasped as being still fluctuating. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be grasped as being maintained in a temporarily stopped state despite being in a state after the final stoppage. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to pay attention to such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the display effect c. However, it is more desirable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be successful without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design.

  That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, the actual effect is not displayed in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped. However, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has succeeded (for example, a character C who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has risen). Under the circumstances, the “development display effect c” appears. In this “development display effect c”, for example, using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, for example, a situation in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed. An effect is made as to whether or not mission c can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect c (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission c can be successful)” in the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command “10H”. As described above, when the player is in the first presentation mode, the display presentation c (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, a specific time until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives. The state of success in the mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the effect on whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) Production such as whether or not) appears. As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect c can appear in such a manner that the specific mission c is successful after the opening effect end timing t4, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H”. Will function as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c”.

  However, as described above, in the extended performance pattern at the time of big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. Two closing control periods appear further. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect contents in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit indication c) and the opening effect before the big hit game (right hit game is started by performing the right hit game) (Prompt to encourage) to be performed. Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the speed of understanding of each player with respect to these effects, when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (timing ty), the second closing control period As a result, the jackpot game and the effect during the jackpot game are started. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 104A, the second closing control period from the timing t4 to the timing ty is ended based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Therefore, for example, as soon as the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the effective gate 6010n is moved to the game ball by operating the operation handle portion 410. When the game is played so that the game passes, the big hit explicit production c and the opening production are cut at that time, or the production itself is almost not appeared (the production is skipped), and the next production (production during the big hit game) is forced. It will be progressed.

  On the other hand, based on the fact that the small win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, the variation time Tc2 (here, the variation time shown in FIG. 96) is selected. Assuming that a change on a special symbol with a description (which will be described as being set at the same time as Tc1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is associated with the effect command “10H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the contents of the display effect c at the time of a small hit (for example, whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (whether the character C can defeat the enemy), etc.) Be started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 106A) associated with the effect command “09H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not ended (the specific mission c is not succeeded or failed). ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative pattern is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”. In addition, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “09H” (FIG. 106) also includes the point of finalizing and stopping at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the big win lottery result for the big hit and the small hit, a single display mode is adopted, and the display mode is distinguished. What has not been done is as described above.

  Furthermore, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for c, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 106A) associated with the effect command “09H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”, in the first closed control period after the change of the special symbol is stopped, Actually, despite the fact that the decorative symbol has been confirmed and stopped, such an expectation that the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successful (for example, a character C who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has stood up). Under the feeling, “development display effect c” appears. In this “development display effect c”, for example, a state in which the character C again faces the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect is made as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successful.

  Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, a specific mission c (successfully defeating an enemy) is not shown, and a specific mission c is not shown. An effect about whether or not the mission c can be successful (an effect such as whether or not the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H” has a certain length. After the first closing control period ends, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear in such a manner that the closing control period is extended. Therefore, after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t5 of the control relating to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the small opening per game (small hit game) at the time of the production command “10H” In this way, the losing explicit effect c appears in the form of the failure of the mission c. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c”.

  In this losing explicit effect c, for example, as a big hit defeat effect different from the losing explicit effect a, for example, an attack by the character C is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character C is regretted. Done.

  According to the extended effect pattern associated with such effect commands “09H” and “10H”, the opening timing t5 of the special winning opening 2003 from the start timing t0 of the special symbol (or the second closing control period). The time until the jackpot clearing effect c ends) will function as one effect for winning the jackpot, so that the player's gaze can be directed to such an effect, It is possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 when the losing explicit effect c is performed, and consequently the small hits.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation concerning the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, a specific mission c can be made successful (character C) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c thus started is displayed when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc3 has arrived. This is ended without extending the production c (in the form of failing a specific mission c).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”. In addition, even when the decoration symbol changes, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extension stop state when the extension symbol is stopped with the suspension stop mode when extended. ing.

  Further, the display effect c in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc3 under the temporary stop in the manner of stopping the loss when the decorative symbol is extended. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 106A and 106B) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character C that has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown) so that the player can know that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t3 shown in FIGS. 106A and 106B can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, whether or not the specific mission c has been successful until the timing t4 has arrived even in the display effect pattern when the effect commands are “09H” and “10H”. Whether or not (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of timing t4, whether or not a specific mission c was successful (whether character C defeated the enemy) Or not) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even in such an effect method, the small win time display effect c is the small hit time. In addition to the fact that most of the first closed control period is used for the display effect c, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of the character C appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively soon after being broken.

  By the way, as described above, such display effects appear when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such game performance (rendering performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a. The winning commands 2003 based on the winning of small hits despite the fact that there is no change in the normal external disadvantaged game state as well as the contents of the production commands “09H” to “11H” from the side 2003 By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content on the premise of opening the game, the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 compared to when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if is greatly increased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), based on the fact that the big win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, the result shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect c ′ at the big hit time associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect c ′ in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to make a specific mission c ′ successful? In the form of the display effect pattern (challenge), such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2003 is confirmed to be open. Bonus performance pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbol variation display is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and a big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) at the time of the effect command “09H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is used as the bonus challenge stop symbol in the variation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when the display effect c 'appears, such as the appropriate character struggling to stop display with the stop display mode that appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the special winning opening 2003 is opened. In order to make it possible for the player to know that an opportunity to acquire a prize ball is granted, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the big prize opening 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect c ′ regarding how many prize balls are possible, a countdown effect c ′ in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Like to do.

  Here, as described above, the countdown effect c ′ is, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds, while explaining that the effective gate 6010n is aimed by a right-handed game. When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the display changes to “0”, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the end of the first closing control period. . However, as will be described later, since the countdown effect c ′ has a different expectation from the countdown effect a ′ described above, the content of the effect is different from each other (for example, the background color is different). I have to.

  Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c ′, when the operation handle is operated as instructed by the effect, the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives as shown in FIG. 106 (a). As soon as the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n, the end timing ty of the second closed control period arrives earlier than in the case of the first production mode. Thereby, a challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls can be obtained by the player is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which open mode (game per long opening, game per middle opening, game per small opening) is used to open the big prize opening 2003. That is, in this case, the player will not only play the big hit game but also play the game ball to the big prize opening 2003 not only when the game is per small opening (small hit game), thereby being in the first production mode. Compared to the above, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 104 (c), in such a big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation is continued for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c ′ is changed to “0”. It is also assumed that a situation where the handle portion 410 is not operated occurs. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time. In this second closing control period, the countdown display is “0” on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation, it is desirable to prevent a new effect from appearing such as “

  However, in the situation where the challenge bonus performance pattern has appeared, such a situation where the performance progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big win is won. In the case of FIG. 104 (d) and FIG. 106 (b)), it cannot occur. In other words, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the amount that the possibility of playing a game per small opening is excluded while there is a stagnant performance (no performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition to this, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 1 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “10H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when a display effect c 'appears with an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  However, as described above, when winning a small bonus, the special symbol is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special symbol is stopped until the game per small opening (small winning game) is started. Until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires (first closed control period having a certain length), and when the timer expires, the valid gate 6010n Regardless of whether or not a game ball has passed through, a game per small opening (small hit game) is started (see FIG. 93).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “10H”, the decorative design is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”. When the game is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the big winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect regarding whether or not it is a thing, the operation timing of the operation handle portion is performed as a countdown effect c ′ indicated by a countdown display in the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as the big winning opening 2003 is opened, and the variation of the decorative design is started. The contents of the performance from the timing t0 to the time when the challenge bonus performance is performed are not distinguished, and when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the same performance, the challenge is performed from the countdown effect c ′ through the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus effect is started with the same series of effect contents as in the case of the big bonus challenge bonus effect pattern (effect command “09H”) that leads to the bonus effect. Accordingly, not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one type (per hit type) as a win that can be won by winning the big prize opening 2003. In addition to games and games per mid-open, it is possible to display effects regarding which game modes appear, including games per small open. Thereby, as compared with the case in the first production mode, the game performance (production performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 is greatly increased. . Of the games per long opening, games per medium opening, and games per small opening, the game per small opening ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not the winning is won, the player may be able to grasp by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big hit in the production within the first closed control period.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “10H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but the small hit is treated as a no-chance loss that does not give an opportunity to win a prize ball. The extended effect pattern in the first effect mode, and the small win is treated as a hit of a high chance to be given a chance to win a prize ball (similar to the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) at the time of a big hit) This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode. In other words, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side, and thereby, a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents can be obtained without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation concerning the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 96 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “11H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit when the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a shift in the production time at the stage, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production c at the time of the big hit, and the contents of the display production c are developed. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” appears as the “non-extended display effect pattern”. For the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit without causing any deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (the effect command “09H”). It will function as an effect pattern at the time of the loss (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the effect command “10H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line) appears, the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined symbol) for this effect pattern (effect command “10H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

  As described above, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H” corresponds to the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 105 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is shown in FIG. 105 (c). The production command corresponds to the display production pattern when the production command is “03H”, and although the production contents differ from each other, the production series addressed to itself (production contents a series, production contents) c series) function as production patterns having substantially the same role.

  However, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” in the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”) is prepared. Not. That is, in the production content c series, if a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” is prepared, in the first production pattern, the display production pattern corresponding to the production command “09H” is displayed. Although it can function effectively as a loss display effect pattern, the second effect pattern cannot function as a display loss effect pattern for the display effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”. Therefore, despite being given a relatively long time, there was a display effect pattern dedicated to losing without the jackpot symbol combination appearing, and we were worried that this might reduce the entertainment interest of this game Is.

  Therefore, when in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”, as the lose effect pattern, the effect pattern at the time of losing (pure loss) that does not satisfy a specific condition is adopted. Only the effect pattern when the specific condition is satisfied (the display effect pattern when the effect command is “10H”) functions as the only presence in place of the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss) To come. That is, in this case, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), unlike the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”), “development display production c” appears. The big hit expectation degree at that time must be set within a range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. However, the production content c of the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”) has a longer time than the production content a of the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”). As the jackpot expectation degree, it is executed as an effect with a higher expectation than the effect content a. Therefore, the expectation degree of big hit when the “development display effect c” appears, even if it is within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, this is required as an appropriate value described later. Setting is relatively easy.

  In addition, regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” in the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”), the effect content a is in the second effect mode. By functioning as a loss effect pattern for the hit effect pattern (effect commands “09H”, “10H”) of the effect content c series, not the hit effect pattern of the series (effect commands “01H”, “02H”) As described above, it is avoided that the jackpot symbol combination does not appear as a display effect pattern dedicated to losing. Therefore, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), when in the second production mode, the winning production patterns (production commands “09H” and “10H”) are prepared. The lost effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the lost effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) to the extent that the display effect pattern selection probability of the effect command “04H” is added.

  Although details are omitted, each display effect pattern associated with each of the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect b series shown in FIG. Display having the same form as each display effect pattern (refer to FIGS. 105A to 105D) respectively associated with the a series effect commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, the display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 96 are the effect commands “09H”, It is set as a display effect pattern having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 106A to 106C) associated with “10H” and “11H”, respectively. That is, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 96 and the effect content d shown in FIG. The production relations between the display production patterns associated with the series production commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” are the production commands “01H”, “02H”, Each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (d)) respectively associated with “03H” and “04H”, and effect commands “09H”, “10H”, “11H” of the effect content c series. Are set so as to have the above-described effect relationship with each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 106 (a) to (c)).

  FIG. 107 (a) is a table showing the jackpot expectation degree in the first effect mode separately for each effect content series, and FIG. 107 (b) is a challenge in the second effect mode. It is a table | surface which shows a bonus rush expected degree etc. according to each production content series, respectively. In addition, about the numerical value which shows a probability, since the 2nd decimal place is rounded off and it has shown as a numerical value to the 1st decimal place, the probability total value of each element may not become 100%.

  According to such a setting aspect related to the display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the big hit expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the win effect appears in the first effect mode, The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “0.5%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is “1.5%”. The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “13.7%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is “33.1%”. When the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, the big hit expectation is “100%”, which is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect contents e, a confirmed effect that the big hit is won appears regardless of the effect mode.

  Further, regarding the big hit expectation degree (expectation degree at which the hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in the developed stage, when the developed effect content a appears The big hit expectation degree of "1.3%", the big hit expectation degree when the development content b after development appears "3.7%", the big hit when the development content c after development appears The degree of expectation is “25%”, and the degree of expectation for jackpot when the production content d after development appears is “72.7%”.

  On the other hand, with respect to the challenge bonus entry expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the winning effect appears in the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears. The challenge bonus entry expectation degree is “7.9%”, the challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%”, and the effect content c ′ is displayed. The challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the effect pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the jackpot effect patterns (effect command “01H”, effect command “05H” set as the extended effect patterns. ”), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) that can only function as a loss effect pattern when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H” and the effect command “08H”) prepared in this way is used in the second effect mode. 09H ”, the production command“ 10H ”) and the effect content d ′ for the hit production pattern (the production command“ 12H ”, the production command“ 13H ”).

  According to the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H”, when in the first effect mode, the expectation that a win effect appears including the developed effect contents a and b. Although the degree (expected degree of jackpot) is lowered, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d), thereby It can be avoided that only display effect patterns that cannot be expected are repeatedly performed. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability is low including the effect contents c and d after development, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree of expectation (expected degree of jackpot) is increased (with respect to each display effect pattern of effect contents a and b), and thereby the game entertainment when a specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears. Can be improved.

  Conversely, the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H” is used as a display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series is increased by that amount (operation on the appearance probability). As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of appearance between the contents a to d and the expectation level at which the hit effect appears, as compared with the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side can be reduced. Even if it is not changed one by one, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects.

  Moreover, the display effect associated with the effect commands “04H” and “08H” regarding the disparity between the effect contents regarding the expectation level (challenge bonus entry expectation degree) at which the winning effect appears when in the second effect mode. In addition to being used as a display effect pattern for the production contents c and d series, the pattern can be used as a winning combination for winning a winning ball by opening the big winning opening 2003, and one type of small hit is also available. Is further reduced (an operation to reduce the disparity in expectation level where a hit effect appears).

  According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively likely to appear regardless of the type of the effect contents a ′ to d ′. Become. In addition, the entry probability (probability of execution of the winning effect) of the challenge bonus effect in which the granting of the opportunity for winning the prize ball is confirmed will be more equal than in the first effect mode (here, the contents of the effect) a) to d ′) (within a range of ± 10%), even if any production content a ′ to d ′ appears due to the above-mentioned gap in the appearance probability being filled It becomes easier for a person to expect that an opportunity for winning a prize ball will be given.

  In this regard, when in the second production mode, when the challenge bonus production is entered (executed), the “big prize opening 2003 is released in any manner (game per long open, game per medium open, game per small open). Since it is characterized by the effect “whether it is done”, it is better to make it appear more easily as a display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ than when it appears to be biased to any one. It is more desirable to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ according to this embodiment, the effect content a ′ is the most in the appearance probability of the game per long and middle opening. It becomes smaller and gradually becomes larger in the order of the production contents b ′, c ′, d ′. In addition, with regard to the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the production content a ′ is the largest, and gradually decreases in the order of the production content b ′, c ′, and d ′. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears, the possibility that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening is certainly high, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment) , About 40 to 50) is determined to be acquirable, and there is a color with a sense of expectation that the big winning opening 2003 will be opened by a game per long opening or a game per middle opening You can enjoy as a director. When the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears, the probability that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per long opening or the game per middle opening is the probability that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening. Therefore, it is determined that at least a small amount of prize balls can be acquired as a privilege. It will function as an effect of shades such as whether or not it is opened. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ each function as an effect having a hue between the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ and the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. The display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′, and the display effect pattern of the effect content c ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. Is darker. Therefore, the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ are all relatively likely to appear, so that the player can enjoy the effects of various shades.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-described operation for reducing the disparity in expectation level at which the hit effect appears between the contents is smaller than that in the first effect mode is expected to show the hit effect. The degree relationship is to be reversed depending on the production mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and (b), when in the first production mode, the expectation degrees of the production contents b and c are “1.5%” and “13”, respectively. .7% ”, which is smaller than the expectation level“ 33.1% ”of the production content d, while the expectation level of the production contents b ′ and c ′ is in the second production mode. They are “11.8%” and “15.4%”, respectively, and are larger than the expectation degree “10%” of the production content d ′. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  However, when the production pattern of the production content d ′ appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the winning production (challenge bonus production) is executed is certainly greater than when the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′ appears. Although it is low, as long as it enters the challenge bonus production, the big winning opening 2003 is opened by a game with a long and middle opening with a higher probability than the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′. It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the production patterns of the production contents b ′ and c ′ and the production pattern of the production content d ′ are divided according to the player, and such various shades are given depending on the display production pattern. As a result, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  Next, an example of an effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the special winning opening 2003 is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 96, FIG. 105 (a) and FIG. 106 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E). ), The contents of the production are not different and the type is not shown, and the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is started (here, the control related to the big hit game) is started. It will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the type of jackpot and the period are determined using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 is performed. An effect that can indicate the gaming state after the end is performed.

  That is, as described above, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state is either big hit A or B, after the big hit game is finished, both the time reduction function and the probability variation function are activated. It will be controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when either of the big hits A and B is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first shows that the big hit is won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then the long-time opening / closing pattern and the medium time An effect indicating the information (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) relating to the amount of a ball to be displayed as to which of the open / close patterns is used to open the big winning opening 2003 is performed (effect during big hit game). In addition, even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed as the big hit game effect relating to the amount of balls, the big hit is won in the big hit explicit effects a to d. When clearly indicating, the information (type of jackpot) concerning the amount of balls to be played may be displayed together (simultaneously displayed).

  In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state is one of the big hits C to E, after the big hit game is finished, the external disadvantageous game state in which the time-shortening function does not operate (the probability variation function also operates) The normal external disadvantageous game state or the probability variation external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function is activated). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed. Therefore, when one of the big hits C to E is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first indicates that the big hit is won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then either of the big hits A or B By performing an effect different from the effect during the big hit game when is won, an effect indicating that one of the big hits C to E of the big hits A to E is won is performed ( Production during the big hit game). In addition, since the opening mode of the game per mid-opening is adopted at the time of winning the big hits C to E, simply indicating that the big hits C to E have been won, information on the amount of balls It will be shown. In addition, even for an effect that indicates that one of the big hits C to E is won, even if the effect is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed, the big hit is demonstrated in the big hit explicit effects a to d. It may also be displayed (simultaneously displayed) when clearly indicating that it has been won.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96, FIG. 105 (a) and FIG. 106 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second effect mode, the opportunity to open the big prize opening 2003 is There is no difference in the content of the production according to the type of the hit (big hit A to big hit E, small hit), and the type is not shown and the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 is kept secret ( Here, the control for the big hit game or the small hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second presentation mode, the type of winning (big hit, small hit is made using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 is performed. The above-mentioned challenge bonus effect can be performed, which can indicate the type of hit or jackpot) or the gaming state after the period ends.

  That is, in the opening effect (challenge bonus effect) in the second effect mode, first, in what form (game per long open, game per medium open, game per small open) is released. An effect is shown in which information (such as a big bonus, a regular bonus, or a small bonus) relating to the amount of balls to be played is shown. As a result, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per long opening (Big Bonus), it is automatically shown that it is controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big winning A. Will be. In addition, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per small opening (small bonus), it is naturally indicated that the winning is a small winning and the gaming state is not changed. It becomes.

  However, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by a game per middle opening (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as an opening effect. As a result, when the character wins in the battle effect, it is shown that the game is controlled to the probable external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big hit B. On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the battle production, it is indicated that one of the big hits C to E has been won, and after the opening production (big hit game) ends, the time is shortened. It is controlled to an external disadvantageous game state in which the function does not operate (a normal external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function does not operate, or a probability variation external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent production state is limited to a period until a special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that it is in a probable external disadvantaged game state, while when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am doing so. When the character wins in this battle effect, it indicates that the player has won the jackpot, and when the character is defeated, the player is normally in an external disadvantaged game state, and waits for the end of the same period. The latent production state is terminated without any problem.

  As described above, according to the latent effect technique in which the current gaming state is indicated until the period until the special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, as a player, It becomes easy to enjoy whether the game state is in the game state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time-saving function is not activated.

  By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 105 (a), the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 96 when in the first effect mode has the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a”. ”, But as shown in FIG. 108, in addition to the“ extended effect pattern ”, a“ non-extended display effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect a is also associated. It may be.

  That is, in this case, when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the display effect a One of the “non-extended display effect patterns” having the contents is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern.

  Here, as a technique for selecting the “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect “a” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect “a”, for example, A method of selecting either an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery based (B) Based on the type of jackpot won in the jackpot lottery, an “extended display pattern” having the contents of the display effect a and a “non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a In addition to a method of selecting any of “,” a method combining (A) and (B), or the like can be employed.

  Of these, when the method (a) is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are associated with the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern”, respectively. In the first effect mode, the “extended effect” having the contents of the display effect a when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first effect mode. The appearance probabilities of “pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of display effect a are determined. Regarding the setting of the appearance probability, it is important that the expectation of jackpot is higher when the “extended effect pattern” appears than the “non-extended display effect pattern”. It is more desirable to entertain.

  Further, when the method (b) is adopted, when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, the dynamic of the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a The display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such a production method, at a timing t1, a winning result for at least a specific winning type (for example, big hit A) is displayed.

  For example, when a jackpot symbol (a jackpot demonstrating effect that clearly indicates a big hit) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous for the player. In the first closed control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs an opening effect such as “Congratulations!” To congratulate the player. For example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, it is effective if the display is switched to the effect display indicating that the big hit game should be started by the right-handed game. The timing tx when the game ball passes through the gate 6010n is likely to arrive relatively earlier than in the case of the extended display effect pattern, and in the subsequent big hit game, a special big hit effect dedicated to the “big hit A” is performed. Become. However, when a hit effect (a big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates a big hit) does not appear at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A, which is the most advantageous for the player” It will be possible to grasp that it is not won. And in this case, when the big hit explicit production appears through the above-mentioned continuous expected production by the “extended production pattern”, it is possible to grasp that any of “big hit B” to “big hit E” has been won. It will be.

  Further, when adopting a method combining (A) and (B), an effect lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and based on the acquired random number value while referring to the effect lottery table. Thus, either an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a is selected. In other words, by providing an effect lottery table for each type of jackpot, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of “extended effect pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” different in each table. Thereby, for example, the expectation of the type of jackpot that has been won is made different depending on whether it is clearly indicated that the jackpot is won by either “extended effect pattern” or “non-extended display effect pattern”. In addition to the fact that the “non-extension production pattern” has a lower jackpot expectation, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is higher when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit. , “Expansion effect pattern” has a higher jackpot expectation, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is lower. Is also possible.

  In addition to the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command “01H”, the effect command “05H” shown in FIG. 96, and the method related to the selection of “extended effect pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” The display effects patterns “09H” and “12H” can be similarly adopted. However, when the effect commands “01H” and “05H” are used as the display effect patterns, the display effect patterns “03H” and “07H” are lost to the display effect pattern as the winning effect pattern. It can function as a pattern.

  In the example described above with reference to FIG. 106 (a), the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 when in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a”. ”, But as shown in FIG. 109, in addition to the“ extended effect pattern ”, an“ extended effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect c may also be associated. Good.

  That is, in the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c” associated with the effect command “02H”, the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. The content of the effect is not only the display effect pattern of the effect command “11H” when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 106 (c)), but also the display effect after development in which the big hit expectation is higher. It will be the production contents that do not appear. Therefore, when the production command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first production mode, a part of the production command is assigned to the production contents in which the developed display production does not appear. In addition, it is possible to set the winning probability for small hitting higher while keeping the appearance probability of the display effect after development in the first effect mode low. In this case, when in the second production mode, the probability of entry into the challenge bonus production (the expectation level at which the bonus production appears) will be increased by the amount set for the higher probability of winning the small hit. Thus, an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2003 can be given with a higher probability.

  In this case, in the first effect mode, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 is received, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays “the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a” and “the display effect”. One of the “extended effect patterns having the contents of c” is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern. In addition, as a method for selecting the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a” and the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c”, for example, as a result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting either “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” or “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”. When this method is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect a” and “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect c”. In the first effect mode, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 96 is received, the “contents of display effect a” The appearance probabilities of “extended effect pattern having“ and the extended effect pattern having the contents of display effect c ”are determined.

  In addition, regarding a method related to selection of “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” and “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”, the display effect pattern of the above-described effect command “02H” is used. In addition, the display effect pattern of the effect command “06H” shown in FIG. 96 can be similarly adopted. When this effect command “06H” is adopted as the display effect pattern, the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect b” and the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect d” are selected. It becomes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number “15”, production command “15H”) shown in FIG. 96 for determining the big hit is prepared. You may omit it. That is, in this case, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear when the special winning opening 2003 is opened in the second effect mode.

  By the way, in the case where the processing pattern of the game at the time of the big hit is triggered by the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n when starting the accessory continuous operation device (in the case of the aforementioned challenge bonus), the small hit is originally There is a problem that when a player is won, it is easily recognized that the player is not a big hit. That is, in the case of a big hit with the operation of the condition device, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the game ball guide path unit 6010, the game ball is guided to the effective gate 6010n, and passes through this, thereby continuing the role. The actuator is activated and the attacker is released. In this way, in the big hit with the operation of the condition device, the operation of the continuous action device is left to the player's timing, whereas in the case of a small hit without the operation of the condition device, the game ball Regardless of whether or not passes through the effective gate 6010n, that is, even if the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, after the first closed control period having a certain length has elapsed, It will be released. Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display device 1400 (top plate side liquid crystal display device 244) is instructed to be right-handed, whether or not the player intentionally makes a right-handed player, or a right-handed player with a delay The player who is trying to make it can easily determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small win.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, and the advance effect (notice) before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. (Direction) was executed. Therefore, the player expects the preceding effect regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small win, and immediately makes a right turn based on the teaching of the liquid crystal display device. The game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n within the first closed control period. As a result, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the winning ball 2003 is opened (opened for a short period) after the right-handed game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n. It is difficult to determine whether the hit is a big hit or a small hit. Note that the short-term opening of the big prize opening 2003 after the timing when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is, for example, a so-called latent probability change in which, when the lottery result is a big hit, for example, a latent state is set without explicitly indicating a probability variation state. However, the player can also have an expectation that the lottery result is a big hit even if the big winning opening 2003 is opened for a short period of time.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a game ball guiding path unit 6010 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a so that all right-handed game balls are supplied to the game ball guiding path unit 6010. Since the entrance end of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 is opened at the upper right of the game area 5a, the game ball that has been hit right and reaches the right side of the game area 5a enters the immediate game ball guiding path unit 6010. . Thereafter, after the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 immediately below the opening of the game ball guiding path unit 6010, the game ball always passes through the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, although the game ball has not passed through the effective gate 6010n at the stage where the game ball has passed through the effect gate 6011, the game machine may perform an effect that precedes the game ball passing through the effective gate. Become.

  As described above, the falling speed of the game ball is relaxed by the bent portion 6010c and the straight portion 6010d of the game ball guiding path unit (also referred to as a warp unit) 6010, so that the game ball spends a predetermined time in the game. It passes through the ball guiding path unit 6010 and reaches the effective gate 6010n below the gaming ball guiding path unit. In this way, the gaming machine earns this time because it can earn time compared to the case where the game ball falls freely before passing the effect gate 6010n after passing the effect gate 6011. Use the time to improve the quality of the performance by taking a sufficiently long processing time for various effects such as the preceding effect, suggestion effect, notice selection, etc. that are generated when the game ball passes the effect gate 6011. can do.

  Next, an effective embodiment in the case of performing a game process performed when the lottery result is a big win or a small win using the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n will be described. When the main control board 4100 makes a lottery by entering the first starting port 2001 and determines that the big hit / small hit is established, the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command from the main control board 4100 and suggests the lottery result. A predetermined effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns and a special effect is started. As a special effect, for example, a duel scene in which an enemy character (boss zombie) appears and a player character (a warrior who fights zombies) fights is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4100. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 displays a still image of a scene as if a boss zombie attacks the player on the liquid crystal display device 4100, and additionally displays a “right-handed” teaching. When the player makes a right turn in response to this instruction, when the right-handed game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate sensor, the player's interest is invited from the speaker. The sound effect is generated before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n for operating the accessory continuous activation device. At this point, the player expects or has an illusion that the lottery result is a big hit even though it is actually a big hit. When the game ball that has passed the stage gate 6011 passes the valid gate 6010n and the peripheral control board 4140 receives a detection signal from the gate switch of the valid gate 6010n, if the lottery result is a big hit, the warrior wins the zombie. (Big hit result presentation) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to suggest a big hit to the player. Then, the gaming machine ball is passed through the effective gate 6010n, so that the accessory continuous operation device is activated. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 is used for winning a big hit in accordance with the opening of the multiple winning openings 2003. Perform the production. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a small hit, since the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is not performed, the main control board 4100 can be used for a short period of the big prize opening 2003 without the passing of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 executes an effect that the warrior loses to the zombies (small hit result effect) on the liquid crystal display device 1400, suggesting that the player is not a big hit. According to the teaching in the liquid crystal display device 1400, when the player hits the game ball right without delay, the short-term opening of the big winning opening in the case of a small hit is actually after the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n. Done.

  In order to perform the preceding effect in which the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n without providing the effect gate 6011, the timing at which the game ball is fired by the player is indefinite, and the preceding effect is ahead of the result effect. It is difficult in the first place to generate. If only the result presentation that distinguishes whether it is a big hit or a small hit other than a big hit is triggered by the passing of the effective gate of the game ball, the production must be monotonous and uninteresting in the first place. Even if there is a right-handed teaching, the player does not attach importance to this and cannot have enough incentive to launch the game ball toward the effective gate 6010n. In addition, the player can easily know whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is provided with the effect gate 6011 as described above. Although the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 has been described as being input to the peripheral control board 4140, the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 may be input to the main control board 4100. . At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the effect gate by a command from the main control board 4100.

  Since the preceding effect due to the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 is related to the result effect due to the game ball passing through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 determines the type of the preceding effect according to the lottery result. May be changed. For example, the preceding effect when the lottery result is a big hit is a high-frequency sound pattern, and the preceding effect when the lottery result is a small hit is a special low-frequency sound pattern. Further, as a preceding effect, the expectation / reliability for the big hit in the lottery result may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the form of a percentage. Further, a part of the result effect may be displayed as a preceding effect, and the result effect may be in a special form. For example, the result of a battle with a zombie may be displayed as a predecessor effect, and the expected degree of jackpot may be displayed as a result effect. Specifically, even if it is a small hit, an effect of overcoming the zombie with a preceding effect is performed, and a low probability is displayed as a result effect.

  Since the effect due to the passing of the game ball through the effect gate 6011 precedes the passage of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n, the game ball that has passed through the effect gate 6011 is surely valid within the controlled time. Must be able to pass through gate 6010n. Therefore, this is realized by directly connecting the effect gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n using the game ball guiding path unit 6010. If the effect gate is simply provided on the upper right side of the game area 5a, even if the game ball can pass through the effect gate, it cannot always pass through the effective gate 6010n. Also, it is possible to remove the effect gate from the game ball guiding path unit 6010 and provide a sensor at the end of the rail 6033, for example, but in this configuration, even if the game ball that has passed the sensor is strongly launched by the handle device It does not mean that the right area of the game area 5a is reached without exception. In addition, the production gate cannot be provided on the left side of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, the game ball that is right-handed before the big hit game is started and enters the guideway unit 6010 (game ball wasting means) is isolated from the outside in the gameball guideway unit. It is consumed and wasted without being able to enter the first starting port 2001, the general winning port 2004, and the central general winning ports 2004A, 2004B, in other words, forcing the player to abandon the opportunity to receive a lottery. Although it is a useless ball, on the other hand, in order to ensure that the game ball passes through the production gate 6011 in the game ball guide path unit, the game machine gives the player an additional effect for the player in exchange for the price of the useless ball. Can be changed, and a prior suggestion effect (effect display of the effect display device 1400) regarding whether or not to shift to the big hit state (advantageous game state) can be changed. Since the additional effect can be preceded by the result effect in a form related to the lottery result effect, the player has a higher effect of combining the preceding effect and the result effect than when the lottery result effect is simply performed. You can enjoy the benefits of being offered to quality. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching means in a predetermined area that is not received by the predetermined starting port is detected by the main board (specific detection means) by the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n, If a game ball is detected by the specific detecting means when a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects performed by the peripheral control board (effect executing means), the player who loses the opportunity to be selected by lottery It is possible to increase the value of the production by expressing a specific production that can be beneficial to the user (value enhancement means). After the right-handed teaching is given when the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit in a normal gaming state that is not a game state in which the big prize opening is not opened (a big hit game state) and not in a short-time state In the case of small hits, it is clear that the first game ball that passed through the production gate within the specified time was a useless ball that did not have a chance to enter, although it was launched with the right-handed teaching. The peripheral control board detects this waste ball, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the cumulative number of waste balls between jackpots (the higher the cumulative number, the higher the value of the waste balls) The liquid crystal display device 1400 may display a special effect image or a compensation effect moving image as a special effect (for example, a premium character). In addition, when a plurality of game balls pass using the production gate as a useless ball (in the case of a big hit, the game ball passes through the production gate before the grand prize opening is opened even if the game ball passes through the effective gate. The peripheral control board 4140 may change the effect according to the number of passed spheres. Furthermore, the degree of change in the production may be changed according to the value of the game ball, that is, according to 4 pachis, 1 pachis, and the like. For example, in the case of 1 patch compared to the case of 4 patches, the change degree of the effect is set to 1/4. In the case of 4 pachis, a predetermined change occurs in the production with one game ball. In the case of 1 pachis, the same change occurs in the production only after 4 balls are supplied as waste balls. For example, every time a pachi game ball passes through the production gate as a waste ball, the production screen is focused, the production screen density is increased, and the like.

  In the above description, even when the lottery result is a small hit, the lottery result (the effect of losing the zombie) is triggered by the passing of the game ball at the effective gate 6010n as in the case of the big win. In the case of small hits, there is no significance of enabling the accessory continuous operation device without operating the condition device, so that the effect of the lottery result is not triggered by the passing of the game ball in the effective gate 6010. The display effect of the lottery result may be performed at the timing of passing through the effective gate 6010n after passing through the effect gate 6011. As described above, the time from when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 to reach the effective gate 6010n falls within a specific range by the game ball drop speed mitigation means described above of the game ball guiding path unit 6010. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it difficult for the player to determine whether the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit by showing the player a lottery result even if the lottery result is a big hit.

  In addition, when the lottery result is a small hit, the result presentation performed when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is assumed that the warrior is defeated by the enemy character. You may make it win an enemy character. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n in the game ball guiding path unit 6010. For example, the resin case member of the game ball guiding path unit 6010 may be opaque. Or you may make it cover the area | region of the production gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n with a decorative board. By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effective gate 6010n while the effect gate 6011 can be visually recognized by the player, the gaming machine gives the player an effect caused by the passing of the game ball to the effect gate 6011. Suddenly it can be developed into a lottery result production to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect gate 6011, the player feels that the related effect is suddenly generated before the result effect that occurs when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Can be given to. Note that if the lottery result is a small hit and the player's right-handed timing is delayed, or if the big prize opening has been opened for a short period of time, the peripheral control board 4140 passes the game ball through the effect gate. Even so, the predecessor effect is not generated. In addition, the peripheral control board 4140 may cause a movable accessory to behave as a preceding effect by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 without being limited to the sound effect described above. In addition, as the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and then passes through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 steps up related effects such as sound effect, liquid crystal effect, and movable accessory effect. It can also be executed. For example, when the lottery result is a big hit, the amount of movement of the movable accessory is reduced when the game ball passes the effect gate 6011, and the amount of movement of the movable accessory is increased when the game ball passes the effective gate 6010n. Or, a predetermined movable accessory is operated in the former case, and another movable accessory is operated in the latter case. Further, the gaming machine may change the aspect of the effect at the effect gate 6011 and / or the effective gate 6010n according to the number of game balls that have passed through the effect gate 6011 within a predetermined time. As described above, since the game ball always passes through the effect gate 4011 before passing through the effective gate 6010n, the game result is out (small hit) even though the lottery result effect is left to the player's timing. In this case, the player can realize a gaming machine that can be expected to be a big hit until the end.

  Next, an embodiment of a game process in which the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal device 244 are related will be described. The upper dish side liquid crystal device 244 is disposed at a position where the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the player cannot visually recognize at the same time, and can serve as an auxiliary display device for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. When the peripheral control board 4140 displays an effect image on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the lottery result, the game board side liquid crystal display device 4100 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device are always or in a specific game state. Synchronize with. In this synchronization processing, the peripheral control board 4140 is substantially the same as the moving image related to the moving image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, in particular, the moving image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. The moving image is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Substantially the same includes completely the same image and almost the same image in which the main part of the image is the same. Therefore, the player can continue the game while watching the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400.

  In the process of synchronizing the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control board 4140 validates the input to the player's upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and produces an effect based on this input information. The image is changed, and the effect image after the change is developed on both the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Input to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is made possible by touching, tapping, or the like using the touch panel 246. By using the touch panel, the player can input the entire display of the effect displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, while simultaneously inputting to a predetermined or desired portion of the display screen. The input information is supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 as two-dimensional coordinate information by the touch panel 244. The peripheral control board 4140 determines which part of the displayed image is input based on the coordinate information, and executes image processing such as changing the area of the input part or branching the development of the moving image. To do.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), a special simulation for simulating a warrior (player character) attacking and defeating zombies (enemy characters) 8000, 8002 lurking in a Western-style building while searching for the Western-style building. In a mode or a scene (when the effect displayed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is a predetermined effect), a moving image viewed from the viewpoint of the warrior side is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. Reference numeral 8004 denotes a ceiling air-conditioning duct which is a part of the structure of the Western-style building. In the initial stage of this mode, the player advances the game while gazing at the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 before the mode.

  The peripheral control device 4140 causes the zombies A and B to appear in the western building as the game progresses (state shown in FIG. 110 (a)). These zombies gradually approach the warrior and attack them. If the warrior can't defeat the zombie before this attack, the video will switch to a video where the warrior is killed by an attack from the zombie. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 enables an input for a counterattack on the player side. The peripheral control board 4140 enables an input 8006 (for example, an icon of the touch panel) to prompt the user to watch the side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 while enabling input to the touch panel. ) To notify the player of the input opportunity.

  When the player turns the viewpoint from the game area 5a in front of the player based on the promotion display and looks down on the upper plate outside the game area, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is substantially the same as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. An effect moving image is displayed (FIG. 110 (b)). The peripheral control board 4140 displays effective input locations on the display screen of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 so that effective input target areas for eliminating zombies can be distinguished from other areas, for example, FIG. As shown in (b), it is emphasized so that it can be clearly discriminated by the player by flashing it, making it translucent, or changing the color. In the example of FIG. 110 (b), since the zombie A area 8000 is flashed, when the player performs input processing by touching or tapping this area, the two-dimensional coordinate information of the input position is obtained. It is sent from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the two-dimensional coordinate information is included in the zombie A area 8000, the peripheral control board 4140 develops an image in which the zombie A is shot by a warrior and knocked down on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. . The same applies to the zombie B region 8002. Further, when the duct area 8004 is tapped, an image in which the duct falls on the zombies A and B is developed. Even if the player taps outside the flashed area, the input position is outside the area where the zombies A and B can be defeated, so that an image for attacking the zombies A and B is not developed. As described above, when the player performs an input to a desired location in almost the entire area of the display screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control board 4140 is based on the identification information (coordinates) of the input location. Judge the suitability of the input. Similarly to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 displays an image of a process that changes according to the player's input. Therefore, an effect (flash or the like) that suggests a suitable input area to the player is not performed. In order to direct the player's attention to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, the above-described promotion display may be continuously displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel correspond to an operable display unit that can be operated by the player. indicate.

  A suitable input area changes every moment according to the development of the production. For example, when the zombie A closest to the warrior further approaches the warrior and the attack from the warrior is no longer in time, the peripheral control board 4140 displays the zombie A on the display screen of the upper side liquid crystal display device 244. The input recommendation effect (flash) for the area 8000 is terminated. The input coordinate position is within the appropriate input range (flash area) according to the distance from the warrior side of the input target (Zombie A area 8000) or the input timing without losing the recommended input effect. However, in the input result determination, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine that the input to the input target is unsuccessful.

  Since the synchronous effect image displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is based on the lottery result, the player eliminates all the attacking zombies, In order to succeed in escaping from the Western-style building, the user tries to energetically input to the touch panel 246. The peripheral control board 4140 can change the target displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 according to the lottery result. For example, if the lottery result is a big hit, you had to reduce the number of zombies appearing, increase the attack power against the zombies or decrease the defense power of the zombies, for example, you had to tap the zombie area multiple times The zombies can be defeated with a single tap, making the production easier to proceed successfully (warriors escape from the Western-style building). On the other hand, if the lottery result is out of play or a small hit, even if the player has a good operation, the production is likely to fail (the warrior fails to escape from the Western-style building). For example, by operating the recommended input area accurately so that the number of touches is higher than that of other players, the peripheral control board can reduce the number of player inputs or damage the enemy character per input. No matter how good the actions for the player's operation are, such as the fact that the input to the part of the recommended input area shown to the player is not actually enabled, no matter how ambitious the operation is Or, no matter how fast you operate. Make the result of the operation fail. The player can expect that the lottery result is a big hit when his input is effectively changed to the effect display, for example, when the zombies are efficiently driven out.

  By synchronizing the effect of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the effect of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and allowing the player to input the effect on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the player's The change in effect due to the input can be reflected in the effect of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side. Therefore, while the effect in the game area 5a is expanded and expanded beyond the game area, the player's attention is directed to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 There is also concern that attention may be neglected. Since the final branch effect of whether or not the lottery result is a big hit is performed on the game board side (game area side), it is beneficial to have the player pay attention to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 at this time. If the player keeps paying attention to the upper liquid crystal display device 244 for a long time, he / she may not notice the final effect whether or not the lottery result on the game board side is a big hit, or the notice will be delayed. On the other hand, it may be harsh to ask the player to pay attention to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 while paying attention to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 performs an effect for giving the player an opportunity to refocus the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. For example, the peripheral control board 4140 generates a ringing sound, notifies the display of “view the front liquid crystal” from the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device 244, or centers the drop movable accessory 6250 described above. The top plate immediately before the execution of the final branch effect or immediately after the start of the final branch effect by the surprise operation of the movable accessory such as suddenly dropping from the upper back side of the accessory 2300 to the front surface of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 The viewpoint of the player who is paying attention to the side liquid crystal display device 244 is drawn to the game board side.

  As described above, the form of input allowed to the touch panel 246 is not limited to the form for setting an attack on a specific display area such as a zombie. For example, the peripheral control board 4140 changes the traveling direction in the warrior's activity area (western building) depending on which direction key of the direction keys displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is touched by the player. The image is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the peripheral control board 4140. Also, other input devices (production buttons, production dials) can be used as auxiliary or reinforcement for input on the touch panel 246. As described above, the input of the touch panel is specified as two-dimensional information. However, by using information from another input device as additional dimension information, the input information can be varied. For example, the peripheral control board 4140 can utilize the pressing force of the player against the touch sensor panel in addition to the two-dimensional information by the touch by combining the touch sensor with the press sensor. The pressing force can be used as information in the z-axis direction or used as information indicating directionality. In addition, a small camera is incorporated in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control board 4140 detects the player's line-of-sight direction by face recognition technology based on information from the small camera, and the player now displays the upper plate side liquid crystal display. It can be determined whether the device 244 is focused or not (whether the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is focused).

  Although the recommended input effect (flash) in the specific area displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is not displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, it is unique information for the player side. As other unique information, for example, there is expectation information when a zombie attack is successful and a big hit can be expected. When the player is paying attention to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, the player watching the player around the player is on the upper plate side because the head of the player is tilted to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. It becomes easy to view the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 synchronized with the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 244. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 monitors the player's input status, and information according to the surrounding game viewers, for example, information that evaluates the player's input superiority or inferiority. A text display indicating that the player is likely to win) may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as unique information.

  The touch panel increases the degree of freedom of the player's input, and the display changes not only the display on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 but also the display on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 by the input. The player can change the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 to a desired form, and as a result, the player's consciousness of participation in the performance can be improved and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Note that the peripheral control board 4140 may synchronize the display image of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 and the display image of the game board side display device 1400 while making the display formats of the two different. For example, the former image may be displayed from the subjective viewpoint of the player-side character (the viewpoint of the warrior itself), and the latter image may be displayed from an objective viewpoint overlooking the player-side character. In addition, the latter video is changed to a video showing a warrior from the zombie side. Note that it is possible to input an image to the game board side display device 1400 side, for example, by providing a touch panel on the front glass of the game board. It is more burdensome to apply an operation to the screen, and the operation can be visually recognized from around. Therefore, the operation from the side of the upper liquid crystal display device 244 is preferable. In addition, by configuring the data space for presentation from three-dimensional data, the player can change the presentation screen with more freedom by controlling the position of the virtual camera with the touch panel. Furthermore, by changing the position of the virtual camera of the effect displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the effect displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, different effect images can be displayed in the same image processing space. Can be displayed.

  The gaming machine described here has an opportunity to operate the auxiliary display device (top plate side liquid crystal display device 244) when a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects executed by the effect execution means (peripheral control board 4140). Furthermore, it is substantially the same as the predetermined effect displayed on the effect display device (game board side display device 1400) so that the player can grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the auxiliary display device. By displaying the effect on the auxiliary display device, the effect can be expanded beyond the game area (5a) (cross-border means), so that the player can be positively conscious of participation in the game. As a result, the game quality can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine described here is displayed when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display screen (operable display unit) of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 by the peripheral control board 4140 (operation-containing effect display means). An operation opportunity can be given to almost the entire display area of the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244 or the almost entire area of the range where the predetermined effect is displayed (global operation target means). When the entire area can be operated, regardless of which area of the entire area is operated, the predetermined effect is changed by the player's intention by changing the display mode of the predetermined effect based on the operated region. It is possible to create a creative production that reflects the game (means for creating a desired production). Therefore, it is possible to positively give the player a sense of participation in the game, and to improve the quality of the game. . It should be noted that the above-described whole-range operation possible range may be changed according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244.

  With respect to the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described basic configuration, the pachinko machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described focusing on its characteristic configuration and operation. The pachinko machine according to the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.

[Technology]
A first flow path for guiding the game medium that has passed through the introduction port provided in the game area to the first passage opening and a second flow path for guiding the second medium to a second passage opening different from the first passage opening are formed, A first lot is provided with a lottery means for performing lottery by passing a game medium through the passage port or the second passage port, and a channel through which the game medium passing through the introduction port is guided is the first channel. A gaming machine comprising switching means for switching to a second guidance state in which the guidance state or the flow path is the second flow path,
The lottery means a lottery in which a lottery by passing the game medium through the second passage opening has a higher degree of advantage at the time of winning than a lottery by passing the game medium through the first passage opening. Yes,
The switching means switches the flow path when a plurality of game media pass through the first passage port or the second passage port.

  In the gaming machine according to the above technical idea, the game medium (game ball) that has passed through the introduction port (introduction port 2201) provided in the game region (game region 5a) is used as the first passage port (first start port 2001A). A first flow path for guiding (first start port guide path 2205A) and a second flow path (second start port guide path 2205B) for guiding to a second pass port (second start port 2001B) different from the first pass port. A lottery means (main control board 4100) is formed for performing lottery when the game medium passes through the first passage port or the second passage port. Also, a first guiding state (non-chance state) in which the flow path through which the game medium that has passed through the inlet is guided is the first flow path, or a second guiding state (chance state) in which the flow path is the second flow path. ) Switching means (sorting blade 2202). Furthermore, the lottery means performs a high lottery in which the lottery by the passage of the game medium through the second passage opening has a higher advantage in the win than the lottery by the passage of the game medium through the first passage opening. The switching means switches the flow path when a plurality of game media pass through the first passage port or the second passage port.

  In the gaming machine according to the above technical idea, the lottery means that the lottery by the passage of the game medium at the second passage opening has an advantage in the winning when compared with the low lottery by the passage of the game medium at the first passage opening. A high lottery is held. However, since the low lottery and the high lottery are performed alternately, the game may be monotonous.

  In this regard, the switching means in the gaming machine according to the technical idea described above switches the flow path when a plurality of game media pass through the first passage port or the second passage port. For this reason, when a game medium is introduced into the introduction port, a low lottery is performed until a plurality of game media pass through the first passage port, and then a plurality of game media pass through the second passage port. A high lottery will be held in the meantime. Therefore, for example, a specification in which a high lottery period continues after a low lottery period continues for a certain period can be used. As a result, the monotony of the game can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine according to the above technical idea will be further described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 1 in particular. The pachinko machine according to the above technical idea is different from the pachinko 1 mainly in the aspect of the first start port. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the first starting port 2001, whereas the pachinko machine 1A according to the technical idea described above is a sorting unit having a first starting port and a second starting port. The main difference between the two is that they are provided.

  111 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1A according to the above technical idea, FIG. 112 (a) is an enlarged front view of the sorting unit, (b) is a view taken along the line bb in FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view thereof. In the pachinko machine 1A, instead of the first start port 2001 in the pachinko machine 1 described above, a first sorting unit 2200 having a first start port and a second start port is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the first sorting unit 2200 in the pachinko machine 1A is disposed at a position approximately below the center in the width direction of the game board 5 and slightly below the center in the height direction. A first start port 2001A and a second start port 2001B are formed at the left and right positions of the lower end of the first sorting unit 2200, respectively. The first start port 2001A and the second start port 2001B are arranged at substantially symmetrical positions with the vertical line passing through the substantially center position in the width direction of the game board 5 as the symmetry axis. In the pachinko machine 1A according to this aspect, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 is changed by the game ball entering the first starting port 2001A, and the second starting port 2001B or the third When the game ball enters the start opening 2005c, the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1186 varies. Further, the control when the game ball enters the second start port 2001B is performed according to the control when the game ball enters the third start port 2005c, and is displayed on the second special symbol display 1186. The second special symbol changes. In the pachinko machine 1 described above, the start port in the second start port unit 2005 is the second start port 2005c. However, in the pachinko machine 1A here, for convenience, the start port is the third start port 2005c, One of the start ports in the sorting unit 2200 will be described as a second start port 2001B.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the first sorting unit 2200 includes an introduction port 2201 disposed slightly above the center of the first start port 2001A and the second start port 2001B. A distribution blade 2202 is provided below the inlet 2201. The first start port 2001A, the second start port 2001B, and the sorting blade 2202 are accommodated in a transparent case member 2203.

  The case member 2203 is formed so as to protrude toward the front side of the board surface, and an introduction flow path 2200A through which a game ball can pass is formed above the sorting blade 2202 inside the case member 2203. . A transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is attached to the surface of the case member 2203. Further, a first starting port guide path 2205A is formed on the inner side of the case member 2203 and on the lower left side of the distribution blade 2202, and on the inner side of the case member 2203 and on the lower right side of the distribution blade 2202, the first A two start port guide path 2205B is formed. A game ball can pass through each of the first start port guide path 2205A and the second start port guide path 2205B.

  A game ball that has flowed down the game board 5 can enter the introduction port 2201, and the game ball that has entered from the introduction port 2201 is introduced into the first sorting unit 2200. The introduction port 2201 is guided to the sorting blade 2202 via the introduction flow path 2200A. The distribution blade 2202 distributes the guided game balls to the first starting port guiding path 2205A or the second starting port guiding path 2205B. The game ball that has passed through the first start port guide path 2205A is guided to the first start port 2001A, and the game ball that has passed through the second start port guide path 2205B is guided to the second start port 2001B.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the distribution blade 2202 can swing around a rotation shaft 2202X along the vertical direction with respect to the game board 5, and the rear side end of the rotation shaft 2202X. The blade switching motor 2202M is connected to the section. As shown in FIG. 115, the blade drive motor 2202X is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140, and the peripheral control board 4140 performs drive control of the blade drive motor 2202M.

  Further, when the blade drive motor 2202M is driven, the rotation shaft 2202X rotates, and the distribution blade 2202 swings as the rotation shaft 2202X rotates. As shown in FIG. And a state in which the sorting blade 2202 is tilted to the left as shown in FIG. 114 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the game ball introduced from the inlet 2201 when the sorting blade 2202 is tilted to the right is guided to the first start guide path 2205A. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), the game ball introduced from the introduction port 2201 when the sorting blade 2202 is tilted to the left is guided to the second start guide path 2205B. A state in which the sorting blade 2202 is tilted to the right is referred to as a “first taxiway guidance state”, and a state in which the sorting blade 2202 is tilted to the left is referred to as a “second taxiway guidance state”. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the introduction port 2201 while in the first starting guideway guiding state is guided to the first starting guideway 2205A and enters the first starting port 2001A. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the introduction port 2201 when in the second start guide route guidance state is guided to the second start guide route 2205B and enters the second start port 2001B.

  In this way, the first starting guideway guiding state and the second guiding path guiding state in the sorting blade 2202 are switched by driving the blade drive motor 2202M by the peripheral control board 4140. The procedure for switching the guiding state in the sorting blade 2202 will be described later.

  The transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is attached so as to cover the entire surface of the case member 2203. The transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is configured to display an arbitrary image or the like as appropriate. In particular, the transmission type liquid crystal display 2204 can display a chance image (first chance image, second chance image) and non-chance image (first non-chance image, second non-chance image). Displaying these chance images on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 suggests the arrival of a chance state that is an opportunity for a high lottery using the first sorting unit 2200. These chance images and non-chance images will be described later.

  Further, the sorting blade 2202 is provided with a position sensor 2202S (see FIG. 115). The position sensor 2202S is a sensor that can detect whether the upper end portion of the sorting blade 2202 is located on the right side or the left side of the center line. When the upper end portion of the sorting blade 2202 is located on the right side of the center line, the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state, and when it is located on the left side, the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state. It becomes. As the position sensor 2202S, an encoder, a potentiometer, an optical sensor, or the like can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the position sensor 2202S is connected to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 is provided with a transmissive liquid crystal display display control circuit that performs display control of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. It has been. In addition, a transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140, and the peripheral control board 4140 can perform display control of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204.

  Further, the first start port switch 3022A, the second start port switch 3022B, and the sorting blade drive motor control substrate 4190 of the start port switch 3022 are electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 4140. The first start port switch 3022A transmits a start port detection signal to the peripheral control board 4140 when a game ball enters the first start port 2001A, and the second start port switch 3022B is connected to the second start port 2001B. When a game ball enters, a start port detection signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a start port counter 4140c that counts the number of game balls that enter the start port based on the start port detection signal transmitted from the start port switch 3022. The peripheral control MPU 4150a on the peripheral control board 4140 transmits a motor drive command to the sorting blade drive motor control board 4190 when the count value of the start port counter 4140c reaches a predetermined count number. The distribution blade drive motor control board 4190 is electrically connected to the distribution blade drive motor 2202M, and the distribution blade drive motor control board 4190 drives the distribution blade according to the transmitted motor drive command. Drive control of the motor 2202M is performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), when the counter value of the starting port counter 4140c is 0 to 2, the first guiding path guidance state is established, and when the counter value of the starting port counter 4140c is 3 to 5, Then, drive control of the sorting blade drive motor 2202M is performed so as to be in the second guiding path guiding state. For this reason, the distribution blade drive motor control board 4190 drives the distribution blade drive motor 2202M when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c increases from 2 to 3 and returns from 5 to 0. The relationship between the change in the counter value of the start port counter 4140c and the change in the guidance path guidance state is as shown in FIG. 116 (b).

  Here, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c increases from 2 to 3, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the upper end of the sorting blade 2202 is moved from the right side to the left side, and the first sorting unit 2200 is moved. Is changed from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state. When the counter value of the start port counter 4140c returns from 5 to 0, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the upper end of the sorting blade 2202 is moved from the left side to the right side, and the first sorting unit 2200 is moved. The first taxiway guidance state is changed to the second taxiway guidance state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1A, random numbers generated with a random number range of, for example, 0 to 99 are prepared as jackpot symbols for random numbers regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected. In point, it is common with the pachinko machine 1 described above. Therefore, in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random values is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. Then, the acquired random number value is used for the process of determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, the jackpot A is determined. If it is 53-57, it is determined as big hit B, if it is 58-63, it is determined as big hit C, if it is 64-81, it is determined as big hit D, and if it is 82-99, it is determined as big hit E. . However, in the pachinko machine 1A according to this aspect, the probability of the type of jackpot determined by the changing special symbol is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118, in the case of the lottery by the first special symbol, the probability that the type of big hit (hit with the operation of the condition device) is determined as “big hit A” is “1%”. Yes, the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit B” is “4%”, the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit C” is “5%”, and the jackpot type is “big hit” The probability of being determined as “D” is “70%”, and the probability of being determined as “big hit E” is “20%”. On the other hand, in the case of the lottery with the second special symbol, the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit A” is “50%”, and the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit B” is “20%”. The probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit C” is “7%”, the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit D” is “3%”, and “hits E” The probability of determination is “20%”.

  These jackpots A to E are jackpots similar to those of the pachinko machine 1 described above, and when “big jackpot A” is won, the jackpot A will be won regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is selected. After the corresponding jackpot game is performed, the game is controlled to the probable external advantageous game state. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot A, the opening / closing member 2006 is opened and closed as a long-open game that repeats many times (in this embodiment, 16 times) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. . In the game per long opening, a large amount of prize balls (about 1750 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  In addition, even when “big hit B” is won, regardless of the game state at the time of the hit, the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit B is performed, and then it is controlled to the probability change external advantageous game state. . However, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot B, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as a middle-open game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment). . That is, in the game per middle opening, a medium amount of prize balls (about 1000 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, if “big hit C” is won, the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit C will be given only when the gaming state at the time of the winning is “external advantageous gaming state in which the time reduction function operates”. After being played, if the game state is controlled to the probability-variable external advantageous game state and the selected game state is not the “external advantageous game state in which the time reduction function operates”, the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed. After that, it is controlled to the probable external disadvantageous gaming state. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot C, the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in this embodiment).

  On the other hand, if “big hit D” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the winning, the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit D is performed, and then it is controlled to the probable external disadvantaged gaming state. The In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot D, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening, which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in the present embodiment).

  On the other hand, when “big hit E” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit E is performed and then it is normally controlled to the external disadvantaged gaming state. . In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot E, the opening / closing member 2006 is played as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a few times in the long-time opening / closing pattern (9 times in the present embodiment).

  Comparing the above-mentioned big hit A to big hit E, the degree of advantage of the big hit A is the highest from the viewpoint of the gaming state to be transferred after the big hit gaming state is finished, the number of prize balls that can be acquired, and the like. In the following, when the advantages are arranged in descending order, the big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, big hit D are in order.

  In the pachinko machine 1A according to this aspect, the type of jackpot is made different depending on the type of special symbol. As its content, the lottery with the second special symbol has a greater advantage in the big hit than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, the lottery with the first special symbol is a low lottery, and the lottery with the second special symbol is a high lottery. Further, specific examples of the degree of advantage here include the number of big hit rounds, probability variation big hits, normal big hits, and the number of short hours after the big hit ends. Alternatively, these elements can be set in a composite manner.

  Next, processing of the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the pachinko machine 1A will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 of the pachinko machine according to this aspect.

  In the pachinko machine 1A, the sub-main process is executed in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. The main process in the peripheral control MPU 4150a is common to the main process in the pachinko machine 1, and is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. In the main process, after the initial setting process is performed (step S1001), a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002). Subsequently, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then the 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  The 16 ms steady process during the main process is executed according to the procedure shown in FIG. First, as the process of step S1100, various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 are analyzed (command analysis process), and the effect control process is executed based on the analyzed effect command (step S1200). Subsequently, transmissive liquid crystal control processing is executed (step S1250), and sorting blade control processing is performed (step S1270). The transmissive liquid crystal control process and the sorting blade control process will be further described later. Each process except the transmissive liquid crystal control process in this flowchart is common to the 16 ms steady process executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes sound control processing (step S1300), and executes light emission decoration control processing (step S1400). Then, for the lamp driving substrate and the liquid crystal control substrate, the commands set in the processing steps S1200 to S1400 (chance state command, non-chance state command, chance waiting command described later, sound output command, light emission) An information output process for transmitting a decoration command or the like is performed (step S1500). After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is performed. The process ends.

  Next, the transmission type liquid crystal control process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the transmissive liquid crystal control process. In addition, there are a plurality of modes in the transmissive liquid crystal control process, and here, a mode of the first transmissive liquid crystal control process will be described. Other transmissive liquid crystal control processing will be described later. The pachinko gaming machine 1A includes all of these transmissive liquid crystal control processes, and one of them can be selectively executed, or includes one of these transmissive liquid crystal control processes. You can also.

  As shown in FIG. 120, in the first transmissive liquid crystal control process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 reservation is 4 (step S1251). Here, when the special symbol 2 hold is 4, the number of special symbol 2 hold is the maximum value, so even if a game ball enters the second start port 2001B at this time, Cannot get a big hit lottery. For this reason, when the special symbol 2 hold is 4, processing for displaying the non-chance display corresponding to the non-chance state on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1265). Therefore, the non-chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259).

  If it is determined that the special symbol 2 hold is one of 0 to 3 and is not 4, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a left-handed recommended gaming state (step S1252). When the gaming state is not the left-handed recommended gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to play the game by aiming at the third start opening 2005c by so-called right-handed (so-called right-handed recommended gaming state). Aiming at the mouth 2201 itself is not advantageous.

  In this case, although it is possible to receive a lottery (high lottery) that is more advantageous when entering the second starting port 2001B than when entering the first starting port 2001A, entering the second starting port 2001B The lottery at this time is a lottery with the same degree of advantage as when entering the third starting opening 2005c. Therefore, if other conditions such as the ease of entering the second starting port 2001B and the ease of entering the third starting port are taken into account, it is advantageous to aim at the second starting port (or the introduction port 2201). I can't say that. Therefore, in this case, a process for displaying a non-chance display corresponding to the non-chance state on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1265). Therefore, the non-chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259).

  Note that the left-handed recommended gaming state in the pachinko machine 1A2 is a part of gaming state in a gaming state (normal gaming state) other than the big hit gaming state. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, it is a gaming state in which the time reduction function is not working, and is a gaming state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the third starting port 2005c. Examples of the left-handed recommended gaming state include a normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both probability change function and time shortening function are not activated) and a probability varying external disadvantageous gaming state (only probability variation function is activated). However, depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine, left-handed is recommended only in the normal external disadvantaged game state, or in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the normal external advantageous game state (only the short-time function is activated), or the probable variable external disadvantageous game state. There may be a gaming state.

  Also, “right hit” refers to a hitting method in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right half of the game area 5a, for example, a hitting method in which the handle lever 504 is greatly rotated. Furthermore, of the “right-handed”, the handle lever 504 is twisted until the rotatable angle is filled, and the hitting method for hitting the shock-absorbing rubber material provided on the upper right side in the game area 5a (see FIG. 47) is “ It may be referred to as “rubber strike”.

  On the other hand, the hitting method for aiming at the left half of the game area 5a is sometimes referred to as “left-handed”. As a general left-handed mode, there is a method of hitting a nail disposed on the left side (the leftmost side) among nails (so-called ceiling nails) provided at the top of the game area 5a. In general, pachinko machines including the pachinko machine 1A2 are designed so that most of the game balls flow to the left of the game area 5a by left-handed.

  If it is determined that the gaming state is the left-handed recommended gaming state, it is determined whether or not the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state (step S1253). The determination as to whether or not the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guidance state is made based on position information transmitted from the position sensor 2202S provided on the sorting blade 2202.

  If it is determined that the sorting blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, it is determined whether the second start port switch 3022B has detected a game ball (step S1254). When the start port detection signal is transmitted from the second start port switch 3022B, it is determined that the second start port switch 3022B has detected the game ball.

  As a result, if it is determined that the second start port switch 3022B has detected a game ball, the start port counter 4140c is incremented (+1) (step S1255). If it is determined that the second start port switch 3022B has not detected a game ball, the process of step S1254 is repeated until the second start port switch 3022B detects a game ball.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5 (step S1256). If the counter value before incrementing the start port counter 4140c is 5, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is incremented in step S1255, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c becomes 6. In this case, it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5, and the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared to 0 (step S1257). As a result of this processing, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c becomes 5 and then returns to 0. Even if the counter value of the start port counter 4140c remains 6 instead of returning from 5 to 0 due to a malfunction of the start port counter 4140c, the second start port switch 3022B detects the game ball next. In this case, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared and returns to zero.

  Here, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared when the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, the distribution blade 2202 is switched from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state. In the first distribution unit 2200, the chance state is switched to the non-chance state. When switched to the non-chance state, the number of times of entering the starting port until the next switching to the chance state is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 as a chance waiting display.

  For this reason, after clearing the counter value of the start port counter 4140c, processing for displaying a chance waiting display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1258). The chance waiting display here indicates that the number of times of entering the first starting port 2001A necessary for the next chance display (hereinafter referred to as “required number of times of entry”) is three more times. I do. Therefore, a chance waiting state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259).

  In step S1256, if it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c does not exceed 5, the first sorting unit 2200 is in the second taxiway guiding state, and the chance state continues. Will be. In this case, processing for displaying the chance display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1260). Therefore, the chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259).

  Furthermore, in step S1253, when it is determined that the sorting blade 2202 is not in the second taxiway guidance state and is in the first taxiway guidance state, the first start port switch 3022A selects the game ball. It is determined whether it has been detected (step S1261). As a result, when it is determined that the first start port switch 3022A has detected a game ball, the start port counter 4140c is incremented (+1) (step S1262). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first start port switch 3022A has not detected a game ball, the process of step S1262 is repeated until the first start port switch 3022A detects a game ball.

  Then, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is less than 3 (step S1263). When the counter value before the start port counter 4140c is 2 is incremented in step S1262, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is 3 when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is incremented.

  When the counter value of the start port counter 4140c increases from 2 to 3 when the distribution blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state, the distribution blade 2202 is switched from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state. In the first distribution unit 2200, the non-chance state is switched to the chance state. Further, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c increases from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 2, the sorting blade 2202 remains in the first guiding path guiding state.

  For this reason, when the incremented start port counter 4140c has a counter value of less than 3, the sorting blade 2202 remains in the first guiding path guiding state, and thus a chance waiting display is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. The process for making it perform is performed (step S1264). In this chance waiting display, a display indicating that the required number of times of entry is subtracted once is performed. Therefore, a chance waiting state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1263 that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is not less than 3 (3 or more), the counter value of the start port counter 4140c has increased from 2 to 3, and the distribution blade 2202 has changed from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state, and has become a chance state. In this case, processing for displaying the chance display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1260). Therefore, the chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259).

  Next, the sorting blade control process will be described. Note that the sorting blade control process also has a plurality of modes as in the transmissive liquid crystal control process, and here, the mode of the first sorting blade control process will be described. Other sorting blade control processing will be described later. FIG. 121 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the sorting blade control process. As shown in FIG. 121, in the first sorting blade control process, first, it is determined whether the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state (step S1271). As a result, when it is determined that the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5 (step S1272).

  If it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c does not exceed 5, the process of step S1272 is repeated until it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5, the sorting blade 2202 is switched to the first guiding path guiding state (step S1273). Therefore, a motor drive command for switching the sorting blade 2202 from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1274).

  Furthermore, when it is determined in step S1271 that the sorting blade 2202 is not in the second guiding path guiding state, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is less than 3 (step S1275).

  If it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is less than 3, the process of step S1275 is repeated until the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is not less than 3 (becomes 3 or more). On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is not less than 3, the sorting blade 2202 is switched to the second guiding path guiding state (step S1276). Therefore, a motor drive command for switching the sorting blade 2202 from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1274).

  Next, the flow of games in the pachinko machine 1A will be described. In the pachinko machine 1A, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B, the distribution blade 2202 is driven by the distribution blade drive motor 2202M, and the first guide path guiding state is established. The second taxiway guidance state is switched. Here, the guiding path guiding state is switched according to the motor drive command transmitted to the sorting blade drive motor control board 4190 that controls the sorting blade drive motor 2202M.

  The motor drive command is generated according to the count value of the start port counter 4140c in the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is 0 to 2, the distribution blade 2202 is in the first guide path guiding state and is in a non-chance state, and the start port counter 4140c When the counter value is 3 to 5, the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state and is in a chance state. By performing this control, after entering the first taxiway guidance state, three game balls enter the first starting port 2001A, thereby switching from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state. . In addition, after entering the second taxiway guidance state, three game balls enter the second start port 2001B, thereby switching from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state. Therefore, every time three game balls enter the start ports 2001A and 2001B, the non-chance state and the chance state are switched.

  A game ball that has entered the introduction port 2201 enters the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B, and a big hit lottery is performed by entering the game ball into the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B. Is called. For this reason, when a game ball enters the introduction port 2201, an opportunity for a big hit lottery is given, and a bonus of shifting to the big hit gaming state is given by winning the big hit lottery. However, since the winning percentage by the big hit lottery is often set to a low value such as one-hundredth, for example, even if a game ball enters the introduction port 2201, a bonus by the big hit lottery is obtained. Opportunities are rare. Therefore, even when a game ball enters the introduction port 2201, there is a possibility that a player who can not easily obtain a bonus by winning the big hit lottery may experience a decrease in interest.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1A described above, when a game ball enters the introduction port 2201 during the non-chance state, the game ball that must enter the first start port 2001A before shifting to the chance state. The number is subtracted by 1. As a result, a bonus that is different from the bonus due to the winning of the above jackpot lottery that the chance status approaches due to the game ball entering the introduction port 2201 in the non-chance status is given. Therefore, the privilege obtained when the game ball enters the introduction port 2201 can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the game ball is guided in the lottery by the first special symbol performed by entering the first starting port 2001A to which the game ball is guided in the first taxiway guidance state and in the second taxiway guidance state. When the lottery based on the second special symbol performed by entering the second starting port 2001B is compared with the lottery based on the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. The degree of advantage in gaming increases. For this reason, it is possible to receive a lottery in which the lottery with the second special symbol is more advantageous than the lottery with the first special symbol.

  Here, for example, if the game is terminated when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, there is a possibility that the opportunity to receive a high lottery may be lost. In particular, in the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the like, for example, when a combination of symbols showing a disappointment as a result of the big hit lottery is displayed in the absence of a holding ball, even if the opportunity for a high lottery is visited, the game motivation is reduced. The game may end as it is.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1A according to this aspect, the chance display is performed by using the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 in order to recognize the opportunity to receive the high lottery. When the sorting blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state and the game ball is guided to the first starting port 2001A, only the low lottery can be received without receiving the high lottery. When in the second taxiway guidance state and the game ball is guided to the second starting port 2001B, a high lottery can be received. The display content of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is determined according to the state of the sorting blade 2202.

  In order to determine the display content of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204, the position sensor 2202 </ b> S provided in the sorting blade 2202 transmits a position signal based on the position of the upper end portion of the sorting blade 2202 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 displays a non-chance image on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 when a right position signal indicating that the upper end of the sorting blade 2202 is located on the right side of the panel is transmitted from the position sensor 2202S. On the other hand, when a left position signal indicating that the upper end portion of the sorting blade 2202 is located on the left side of the board is transmitted from the position sensor 2202S, a non-chance image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. Hereinafter, examples of display modes of non-chance images and chance images will be described.

  FIG. 122A is a diagram showing a state where the first chance image is displayed, and FIG. 122B is a diagram showing a state where the first non-chance image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), when the distribution vane 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state, the game ball introduced into the introduction port 2201 is guided to the second starting port 2001B and becomes a high lottery. The first chance image as the chance image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. Here, the first chance image is an image in which a black image is displayed as an overall background image of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 and a chance display region CTD is formed at the center thereof. In the chance display area CTD, a decorative character “CHANCE TIME!” Is displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the first chance image including the chance display area CTD in which the decorative character “CHANCE TIME!” Is displayed, it is recognized that it is an opportunity to receive a high lottery with the second special symbol. be able to. Even if the sorting blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state and the next game ball is introduced from the introduction port 2201 to the first sorting unit 2200, even if a high lottery is received, the above chance display is performed. Otherwise, it is conceivable that the player does not notice the state and ends the game as it is. In this case, the player may abandon the opportunity even though the opportunity for the high lottery has arrived, and the possibility of losing the opportunity for the high lottery may increase.

  In this regard, the chance display is performed when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state. For this reason, the player who saw the chance display can recognize that the next lottery will be received when a game ball is introduced into the introduction port 2201. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  Furthermore, a decoration character “CHANCE TIME!” Is included as the content of the first chance image. Therefore, it is possible to clearly appeal to the player that the present is in the chance state. Further, since such a chance display is performed by the first distribution unit 2200, an appeal is given to a player with poor knowledge that some chance is generated by the first distribution unit 2200. can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress a loss of opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to further improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol changes during the normal gaming state and the off-line symbol is displayed, the player may be discouraged from continuing to play the game and stop the game as it is. . In this case, the operation of the pachinko machine 1A can be reduced. In this regard, the player can recognize that the distribution vane 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state and the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 has a chance display and the opportunity for high lottery has arrived. Since the game motivation is stimulated and the possibility of continuing the game in order to receive a high lottery can be increased, the effect of suppressing the decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 1A can also be expected.

  Further, the chance display by the first chance image is performed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 provided in the first sorting unit 2200. Here, by performing a chance display with the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 provided in the first distribution unit 2200, the high-lottery is executed by the first distribution unit 2200 that the player often sees frequently. Since attention can be drawn, the chance display can be effectively appealed to the player. Therefore, the chance display can be made easier to recognize.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state, and the game ball introduced into the introducing port 2201 is guided to the first starting port 2001A, and the low lottery. In this case, the first non-chance image as a non-chance image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. The first non-chance image is an image in which a black image is displayed as an overall background image of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 and a number display area NET is formed at the center thereof. The display of the first non-chance image makes the start port guide paths 2205A and 2205B invisible or difficult to see.

  As described above, in the first non-chance image, the start port guide paths 2205A and 2205B are not visible or difficult to view, so that even if a game ball enters the introduction port 2201, only a low lottery can be received. Recognize that it is a non-chance situation that cannot be done, or at least recognize that it cannot receive a high draw.

  In the first non-chance image, the number of times until the chance image is displayed is displayed in the number display area NET at the center of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. In the example shown in FIG. 122 (b), the decorative character “after the chance state” is displayed small, and the decorative character “2” is displayed large. By displaying such decorative characters, the player can recognize that the chance state has arrived when the game ball enters the first start port 2001A two more times. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making the player expect an opportunity to arrive at the chance state.

  Next, another example of the transmissive liquid crystal control process will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the transmissive liquid crystal control process. Here, the aspect of the second transmissive liquid crystal control process will be described. As shown in FIG. 123, in the second transmissive liquid crystal control process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 hold is 4 (step S1251A). Then, a process for displaying a non-chance display corresponding to the non-chance state on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1263A). Therefore, the non-chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259A).

  If it is determined that the special symbol 2 hold is not 4, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a left-handed recommended gaming state (step S1252A). As a result, when the gaming state is not the left-handed recommended gaming state, a process for displaying a non-chance display corresponding to the non-chance state on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1263A). Therefore, the non-chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259A).

  If it is determined that the gaming state is the left-handed recommended gaming state, it is determined whether or not the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state (step S1253A). If it is determined that the two-guidance-path guiding state has been established, it is determined whether the second start port switch 3022B has detected a game ball (step S1254A). When it is determined that the second start port switch 3022B has detected a game ball, the start port counter 4140c is incremented (+1) (step S1255A). If it is determined that the second start port switch 3022B has not detected a game ball, the process of step S1254A is repeated until the second start port switch 3022B detects a game ball.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 4 (step S1256A). If the counter value before incrementing the start port counter 4140c is 4, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c becomes 5 when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is incremented in step S1255A. In this case, it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 4, and the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared to 0 (step S1257A). As a result of this processing, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c returns to 0 after becoming 4. Even if the counter value of the start port counter 4140c remains 5 without returning from 4 to 0 due to malfunction of the start port counter 4140c, the second start port switch 3022B detects the game ball next. In this case, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared and returns to zero.

  Here, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared when the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, the distribution blade 2202 is switched from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state. In the first distribution unit 2200, the chance state is switched to the non-chance state. When switched to the non-chance state, the number of times of entering the starting port until the next switching to the chance state is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 as a chance waiting display.

  For this reason, after clearing the counter value of the start port counter 4140c, processing for displaying a chance waiting display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1258A). In this chance waiting display, the next chance display is performed, which means that the next chance display is performed. Therefore, a chance waiting state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259A).

  If it is determined in step S1256A that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c does not exceed 4, the first sorting unit 2200 is in the second taxiway guidance state, and the chance state continues. Will be. In this case, a process for displaying the chance display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1262A). Therefore, the chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259A).

  Further, if it is determined in step S1253A that the first taxiway guidance state is set, it is determined whether the first start port switch 3022A has detected a game ball (step S1260A), and the first start port switch 3022A is detected. When it is determined that has detected a game ball, the start port counter 4140c is incremented (+1) (step S1261A). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first start port switch 3022A has not detected a game ball, the process of step S1260A is repeated until the first start port switch 3022A detects a game ball.

  Here, if the counter value before incrementing the start port counter 4140c is 0, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c becomes 1 when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is incremented in step S1255. When the counter value of the start port counter 4140c increases from 0 to 1 when the distribution blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state, the distribution blade 2202 is switched from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state. In the first distribution unit 2200, the non-chance state is switched to the chance state. For this reason, a process for displaying the chance display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1262A). Therefore, the chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259A). Note that instead of the determination in step S1260A, when the first start port switch 3022A detects a game ball, the process may proceed to step S1262A as it is.

  Further, as described above, as the second transmissive liquid crystal control process is performed, the sorting blade control process is also the second sorting blade control process. FIG. 124 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the second sorting blade control process. As shown in FIG. 124, in the second distribution blade control process, first, it is determined whether the distribution blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state (step S1271A), and the distribution blade 2202 is in the second state. If it is in the guideway guidance state, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 4 (step S1272A).

  Here, if the counter value of the start port counter 4140c does not exceed 4, the process of step S1272A is repeated until the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 4, while the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is If it exceeds 4, the sorting blade 2202 is switched to the first guiding path guiding state (step S1273A). For this reason, a motor drive command for switching the sorting blade 2202 from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1274A).

  Further, if it is determined in step S1271A that the sorting blade 2202 is not in the second guiding path guiding state, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is less than 1 (step S1275A), and the start If the counter value of the mouth counter 4140c is less than 1, the process of step S1275A is repeated until the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is less than 1 (becomes 1 or more). On the other hand, if the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is not less than 3, the sorting blade 2202 is switched to the second guiding path guiding state (step S1276A). For this reason, a motor drive command for switching the sorting blade 2202 from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1274A).

  When the second distribution blade control process is executed, the motor drive command generated according to the count value of the start port counter 4140c on the peripheral control board 4140 is in the form shown in FIG. 125 (a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (a), when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is 0, the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guide path guiding state and is in a non-chance state, and the counter of the start port counter 4140c. When the value is 1 to 3, the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state and is in a chance state. By performing this control, the game ball enters the first start port 2001A after the first taxiway guidance state is entered, so that the first taxiway guidance state is switched to the second taxiway guidance state. In addition, after entering the second taxiway guidance state, three game balls enter the second start port 2001B, thereby switching from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first start port 2001A, the non-chance state is switched to the chance state, and when three game balls enter the 2001B, the non-chance state is switched from the chance state.

  In the case of performing the second transmission type liquid crystal control process and the distribution blade control process, as in the case of performing the first transmission type liquid crystal control process and the distribution blade control process, the inlet 2201 is set in the non-chance state. As a game ball enters, the number of game balls that must enter the first start port 2001A before shifting to the chance state is decremented by one. As a result, a bonus that is different from the bonus due to the winning of the above jackpot lottery that the chance status approaches due to the game ball entering the introduction port 2201 in the non-chance status is given. Therefore, the privilege obtained when the game ball enters the introduction port 2201 can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When performing the second transmissive liquid crystal control process, as in the case of performing the first transmissive liquid crystal control process and the sorting blade control process, when performing the chance display, FIG. When the first chance image shown in FIG. 6 is displayed and non-chance display is performed, the first non-chance image shown in FIG. 122B is displayed. For this reason, the same operational effects as the case where the first transmission type liquid crystal control process is performed to display the first chance image and the first non-chance image are obtained.

  Further, when the second transmission type liquid crystal control process is performed, the non-chance state is entered only when the count value of the start port counter 4140c is 0. Therefore, in the non-chance state, a game ball is placed in the first start port 2001A. Transition to the chance state with only one entry. Therefore, the arrival time of the chance state can be shortened.

  On the other hand, the chance state is entered when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is 1 to 3. For this reason, since the chance state continues until the game ball enters the second start port 2001A three times, the chance state can be continued for a long period of time. It should be noted that the chance state can be continued for a longer period of time by further increasing the counter value of the start port counter 4140c that is in the chance state.

  In addition, the non-chance state ends when the game ball enters the introduction port 2201 once, and the chance state ends when the game ball enters the introduction port 2201 three times. The stay time in the chance state can be made longer than the stay time. It is considered that a player who plays the pachinko machine 1A can play a game better when staying in the chance state than when staying in a non-chance state. Therefore, a long time can be easily provided to the player as a time during which the game can be played with good feeling.

  Next, still another example of the transmissive liquid crystal control process will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the transmissive liquid crystal control process. Here, an aspect of the third transmissive liquid crystal control process will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, in the third transmission type liquid crystal control process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 hold is 4 (step S1251B). Then, a process for displaying a non-chance display corresponding to the non-chance state on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1265B). Therefore, the non-chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259B).

  When it is determined that the special symbol 2 hold is not 4, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a left-handed recommended gaming state (step S1252B). As a result, when the gaming state is not the left-handed recommended gaming state, a process for displaying a non-chance display corresponding to the non-chance state on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1265B). Therefore, the non-chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259B).

  If it is determined that the gaming state is the left-handed recommended gaming state, it is determined whether or not the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state (step S1253B). If it is determined that the two-guidance-path guidance state is set, it is determined whether the second start port switch 3022B has detected a game ball (step S1254B). When it is determined that the second start port switch 3022B has detected a game ball, the start port counter 4140c is incremented (+1) (step S1255B). If it is determined that the second start port switch 3022B has not detected a game ball, the process of step S1254B is repeated until the second start port switch 3022B detects a game ball.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5 (step S1256B). If the counter value before incrementing the start port counter 4140c is 4, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c becomes 5 when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is incremented in step S1255B. In this case, it is determined that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 4, and the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared to 0 (step S1257B). As a result of this processing, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c becomes 5 and then returns to 0. Even if the counter value of the start port counter 4140c remains 5 without returning from 5 to 0 due to malfunction of the start port counter 4140c, the second start port switch 3022B detects the game ball next. In this case, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared and returns to zero.

  Here, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is cleared when the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, the distribution blade 2202 is switched from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state. In the first distribution unit 2200, the chance state is switched to the non-chance state. When switched to the non-chance state, the number of times of entering the starting port until the next switching to the chance state is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 as a chance waiting display.

  For this reason, after clearing the counter value of the start port counter 4140c, processing for displaying a chance waiting display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1258B). In the chance waiting display here, a display indicating that the necessary number of times of entering the ball is five times is performed. Therefore, a chance waiting state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259B).

  If it is determined in step S1256B that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c does not exceed 5, the first sorting unit 2200 is in the second taxiway guidance state, and the chance state continues. Will be. In this case, a process for displaying the chance display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1260B). Therefore, the chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259B). In addition, it can also be set as the aspect which progresses to step S1257B as it is, when the 2nd starting port switch 3022B detects a game ball instead of the process of step S1254B-step S1256B.

  Furthermore, in step S1253B, when it is determined that the sorting blade 2202 is not in the second taxiway guidance state and is in the first taxiway guidance state, the first start port switch 3022A selects the game ball. It is determined whether it has been detected (step S1261B). As a result, when it is determined that the first start port switch 3022A has detected a game ball, the start port counter 4140c is incremented (+1) (step S1262B). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first start port switch 3022A has not detected a game ball, the process of step S1262B is repeated until the first start port switch 3022A detects a game ball.

  Then, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is less than 5 (step S1263B). If the counter value before incrementing the start port counter 4140c is 4, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is incremented in step S1262B, the counter value of the start port counter 4140c becomes 5.

  When the counter value of the start port counter 4140c increases from 2 to 3 when the distribution blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state, the distribution blade 2202 is switched from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state. In the first distribution unit 2200, the non-chance state is switched to the chance state. Further, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c increases from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 2, the sorting blade 2202 remains in the first guiding path guiding state.

  For this reason, when the incremented start port counter 4140c has a counter value of less than 5, the sorting blade 2202 remains in the first guiding path guiding state, and thus a chance waiting display is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. The process for making it perform is performed (step S1264B). In this chance waiting display, a display indicating that the required number of times of entry is subtracted once is performed. Therefore, a chance waiting state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1263B that the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is not less than 5 (5 or more), the counter value of the start port counter 4140c has increased from 4 to 5, and the distribution blade 2202 has changed from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state, and has become a chance state. In this case, a process for displaying the chance display on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is performed (step S1260B). Therefore, the chance state command is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1259B).

  Further, as described above, with the third transmission type liquid crystal control process, the sorting blade control process also becomes the third sorting blade control process. FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the third sorting blade control process. As shown in FIG. 127, in the third distribution blade control process, first, it is determined whether the distribution blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state (step S1271B), and the distribution blade 2202 is the second. If it is in the guideway guidance state, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5 (step S1272B).

  If the counter value of the start port counter 4140c does not exceed 5, the process of step S1272B is repeated until the counter value of the start port counter 4140c exceeds 5, while the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is If it exceeds 5, the sorting blade 2202 is switched to the first guiding path guiding state (step S1273B). Therefore, a motor drive command for switching the sorting blade 2202 from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1274B).

  Furthermore, when it is determined in step S1271B that the sorting blade 2202 is not in the second guiding path guiding state, it is determined whether the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is less than 5 (step S1275B), and the start is started. If the counter value of the mouth counter 4140c is less than 1, the process of step S1275A is repeated until the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is not less than 5 (becomes 5 or more). On the other hand, if the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is not less than 5, the sorting blade 2202 is switched to the second guiding path guiding state (step S1276B). Therefore, a motor drive command for switching the sorting blade 2202 from the second taxiway guidance state to the first taxiway guidance state is set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb (step S1274B).

  When the second distribution blade control process is executed, the motor drive command generated according to the count value of the start port counter 4140c on the peripheral control board 4140 is in the form shown in FIG. 128 (a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is 0 to 4, the distribution blade 2202 is in the first guide path guiding state and is in a non-chance state, and the start port counter 4140c. When the counter value is 5, the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state and is in a chance state. By performing this control, five game balls enter the first starting port 2001A after entering the first taxiway guidance state, thereby switching from the first taxiway guidance state to the second taxiway guidance state. . In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 2001B after the second taxiway guidance state is entered, the second taxiway guidance state is switched to the first taxiway guidance state. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first start port 2001A, the non-chance state is switched to the chance state, and when three game balls enter the 2001B, the non-chance state is switched from the chance state.

  In the case of performing the second transmission type liquid crystal control process and the distribution blade control process, as in the case of performing the first transmission type liquid crystal control process and the distribution blade control process, the inlet 2201 is set in the non-chance state. As a game ball enters, the number of game balls that must enter the first start port 2001A before shifting to the chance state is decremented by one. As a result, a bonus that is different from the bonus due to the winning of the above jackpot lottery that the chance status approaches due to the game ball entering the introduction port 2201 in the non-chance status is given. Therefore, the privilege obtained when the game ball enters the introduction port 2201 can be increased, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When performing the second transmissive liquid crystal control process, as in the case of performing the first transmissive liquid crystal control process and the sorting blade control process, when performing the chance display, FIG. When the first chance image shown in FIG. 6 is displayed and non-chance display is performed, the first non-chance image shown in FIG. 122B is displayed. For this reason, the same operational effects as the case where the first transmission type liquid crystal control process is performed to display the first chance image and the first non-chance image are obtained.

  Further, when the second transmission type liquid crystal control processing is performed, the non-chance state is entered when the count value of the start port counter 4140c is 0 to 4, and the chance state is entered when the count value of the start port counter 4140c is 5. . For this reason, the non-chance state continues for a relatively long time before the chance state arrives. Therefore, a sense of expectation for the arrival of the chance state can be increased. Moreover, since the chance state can be reduced, the degree of advantage given in the chance state can be increased accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the counter value of the start port counter 4140c is 5, the chance state is entered. For this reason, the chance state ends when the game ball enters the second starting port 2001A once, so the chance state is shortened. Therefore, the expectation given to the player when the chance state is reached can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1A described above, a second chance image different from the first chance image may be displayed as the chance image. Alternatively, a second non-chance image different from the first non-chance image can be displayed as the non-chance image. Hereinafter, the second chance image and the second non-chance image will be described.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a diagram showing a state where a second chance image is displayed, and FIG. 129 (b) is a diagram showing a state where a second non-chance image is displayed. In the second chance image, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the areas in front of the introduction flow path 2200A and the second start port guide path 2205B in the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 are turned off, and the first start port guide path 2205A. It is the image which displayed the front area | region in black. By displaying the second chance image, the display on the front side of the second starting port guide path 2205B in the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is turned off so that the back of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 can be visually recognized.

  When the second chance image is displayed, the second starting port guiding path 2205B is easily visible through the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 that is turned off, and the first starting port guiding path 2205A is invisible or difficult to view. It has become. For this reason, it can be easily recognized that the game ball introduced from the introduction port 2201 is guided to the second start port 2001B. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2001B, a lottery with a second special symbol is performed, and the content of the big hit when winning the big win is advantageous. By performing the chance display for displaying the second chance image on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204, it can be recognized that the lottery by the high lottery can be received. As a result, it is possible to suppress a loss of opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the second non-chance image is an image in which the entire area of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is blacked out or converted into a black image. This is an image in which the entire area of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is blacked out or blackened. The display of the first non-chance image makes the start port guide paths 2205A and 2205B invisible or difficult to see. In this way, even if a game ball enters the introduction port 2201, it is recognized that only a low lottery can be received, or at least a high lottery cannot be received.

  Further, unlike the first non-chance image, the second non-chance image does not display the required number of times of entering in the non-chance state. For this reason, when the second non-chance image is displayed, it is difficult to recognize when the chance state comes when it is in the non-chance state. Therefore, even when the game ball is in the non-chance state, every time a game ball enters the introduction port 2201, it is possible to give a sense of expectation of transition to the chance state. A feeling can be heightened and the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  As a display order relationship between each chance image and non-chance image, the first non-chance image is displayed after the first chance image, and thereafter the first chance image and the first non-chance image are alternately displayed. It is also possible to display the second non-chance image after the first chance image, and then display the first non-chance image and the second non-chance image alternately. Alternatively, the second non-chance image can be displayed after the second chance image, and then the second chance image and the second non-chance image can be displayed alternately. It is also possible to display the chance image and thereafter display the second chance image and the first non-chance image alternately.

  Furthermore, the first chance image and the second chance image are displayed randomly when the chance image is displayed, and the first non-chance image and the second non-chance image are displayed randomly when the non-chance image is displayed. You can also. Furthermore, a chance image and a non-chance image can be displayed in other combinations. In addition to the first and second chance images and the first and second non-chance images, other chance images and non-chance images can be displayed, and the display order and the like can be various. .

  Examples of other non-chance images are images in which the area other than the front of the introduction flow path 2200A and the first start port guide path 2205A is turned off, and the area before the second start port guide path 2205B is blacked out or blackened. It can be. In particular, by alternately displaying this image and the second chance image, when the non-chance image is displayed, the first starting port guiding path 2205A is easily visible while the second starting port guiding path 2205B is visually recognized. Since it is difficult to do so, it can be recognized that the game ball is guided to the first start port 2001A side. In addition, when the chance image is displayed, the second start port guide path 2205B is easily visible, while the first start port guide path 2205A is difficult to view, so that the game ball is placed on the second start port 2001B side. It can be recognized as being guided. Further, in this non-chance image, the first start port guide path 2205A is easily visible, so that it is clearly recognized that the game ball that has entered the introduction port 2201 is guided to the first start port 2001A. Can do.

  Further, as a mode for suggesting the arrival of the chance state using the first sorting unit 2200, for example, the sorting blade 2202 itself can be used instead of using the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. FIG. 130 (a) is a front view of another separate sorting unit, and FIG. 130 (b) is a front view showing a state in which the sorting blades in the separate first sorting unit of FIG. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), the other first sorting unit 2200α includes the same inlet 2201, sorting blade 2202, and case member 2203 as the first sorting unit 2200. Further, a first start port guide path 2205A and a second start port guide path 2205B similar to the first sorting unit 2200 are formed inside the case member 2203, and the first start port guide path 2205A and the second start port 2205A are formed. A first start port 2001A and a second start port 2001B are formed at the lower end of the mouth guide path 2205B, respectively.

  Furthermore, the sorting blade 2202 in the other first sorting unit 2200α includes a direction indicator plate 2202Y. The direction indicating plate 2202Y has an arrow shape and indicates that the indicated direction is the moving direction of the game ball. Although the direction indicating plate 2202Y is disposed inside the case member 2203, it may be disposed outside the case member 2203. Further, the direction indicating plate 2202Y is attached coaxially to the rotating shaft 2202X of the sorting blade 2202, and rotates with the rotation of the sorting blade 2202. Further, when the distribution blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state, the direction indicating plate 2202Y instructs the first starting port guiding path 2205A side as shown in FIG. Is in the second guiding path guiding state, the second starting port guiding path 2205B side is instructed as shown in FIG. 130 (b). Furthermore, the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 and the position sensor provided in the first sorting unit 2200 are not provided, and the control of the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 by the peripheral control board 4140 is not executed.

  In another first sorting unit 2200α provided with the sorting blade 2202 having such a direction indicator plate 2202Y, when the sorting blade 2202 is in a non-chance state, the direction indicator plate 2202Y is moved to the first start port. Instruct the taxiway 2205A side. When the direction indicating plate 2202Y indicates the first starting port guiding path 2205A side, the game ball that has entered the introduction port 2201 is guided to the first starting port guiding path 2205A and receives a low lottery. It suggests that it is not.

  On the other hand, when the sorting blade 2202 is in the chance state, the direction indicating plate 2202Y instructs the second starting port guide path 2205B side. Since the direction indicator plate 2202Y indicates the second start port guide path 2205B side, the game ball that has entered the introduction port 2201 is guided to the second start port guide path 2205B and receives a high lottery. It is suggested that.

  When the other first sorting unit 2200α of this aspect is used, when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state as in the case of using the first sorting unit 2200 described above. , The chance status is informed. For this reason, the player who has been notified of the chance state can recognize that the next lottery will be received when a game ball is introduced into the introduction port 2201. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  Further, the notification of the chance state is performed by the direction indicating plate 2202Y in the sorting blade 2202 provided in the other first sorting unit 2200α. Here, the chance state is notified by the direction indicator plate 2202Y in the sorting blade 2202 provided in the first sorting unit 2200, so that the higher first sorting unit 2200α that the player often sees is used to increase the chance state. Since it is possible to alert the player that the lottery is executed, the chance state can be effectively appealed to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the chance state easier to recognize.

  Furthermore, since the chance state is suggested by the direction indicator plate 2202Y provided in the sorting blade 2202, the chance state can be recognized only by visually recognizing the other first sorting unit 2200α, particularly the sorting blade 2202. Therefore, the chance state can be easily recognized. Furthermore, since the sorting blade 2202 includes the direction indicator plate 2202Y, attention can be paid to the sorting blade 2202, so that the presence of the sorting blade 2202 can be appealed.

  Unlike the case where the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is provided, the control by the peripheral control board 4140 or the like is not necessary. For this reason, the wiring to the peripheral control board 4140 and the like can be reduced, and the configuration of the peripheral control board 4140 and the like can be made compact, and simplification of the entire pachinko machine can be achieved. Furthermore, it can contribute to the reduction of the control burden of the peripheral control board 4140 and the like.

  It is to be noted that such an image like the direction indicating plate 2202Y is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 and is similar to the direction indicating plate 2202Y displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 so as to move in the same manner as the direction indicating plate 2202Y. You can also move the image you want. Alternatively, two arrows, an arrow indicating the first starting port guiding path 2205A side (hereinafter referred to as “first arrow”) and an arrow indicating the second starting port guiding path 2205B side (hereinafter referred to as “second arrow”). Can be displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204, and the images of the first arrow and the second arrow can be used to suggest a chance state and a non-chance state. For example, in the non-chance state, the first arrow is displayed brightly and the second arrow is displayed dark, while in the chance state, the second arrow is displayed brightly and the first arrow is displayed darkly. it can.

  Next, another aspect of the gaming machine will be described. 131 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to another embodiment, and FIG. 132 is an enlarged front view of a second sorting unit. The pachinko machine 1B1 according to this aspect is mainly different from the pachinko machine 1A in the configuration in the vicinity of the second sorting unit 2400. As shown in FIG. 131, the pachinko machine 1B1 according to this aspect includes a second sorting unit 2400. The second sorting unit 2400 is mainly different from the first sorting unit 2200 in the pachinko machine 1A in that a chance display device 2206 is provided. However, a mode in which the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is not provided may be employed.

  A pachinko machine 1B1 according to this aspect includes a second sorting unit 2400. As shown in FIG. 132, the second sorting unit 2400 is similar to the first sorting unit 2200 in the pachinko machine 1A. The inlet 2201, the sorting blade 2202, the first starting port 2001A, and the second starting port 2001B. It has. In addition, a case member 2003 is provided, and a first start port guide path 2205A for guiding a game ball from the introduction port 2201 to the first start port 2001A and a second start port 2001B from the introduction port 2201 are provided inside the case member 2203. A second starting port guide path 2205B for guiding the game ball is formed. Further, a transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is attached to the surface of the case member 2203.

  Further, in the second distribution unit 2400, the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is used for predetermined effects, and the case member 2203 is directly visible when viewed from the player side through the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. It is said that. For this reason, the introduction flow path 2200A, the first start port guide path 2205A, the second start port guide path 2205B, and the like formed inside the case member 2203 are easily visible from the player side. Furthermore, the sorting blade 2202, the first starting port 2001A, the second starting port 2001B, and the like are also easily visible from the player side. However, it is also possible to display an image on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 in the same manner as the pachinko machine 1A.

  Further, a chance display device 2206 is provided above the introduction port 2201. The chance display device 2206 includes a viewing window 2206A formed above the introduction port 2201. Further, the chance display device 2206 includes a colored transparent plate 2206B in which characters “CHANCE” are engraved, and the colored transparent plate 2206B can be turned on by a lamp disposed on the back side thereof. The colored transparent plate 2206B is visible from the surface side of the game board 5 through the visual recognition window 2206A. In this way, the state where the characters “CHANCE” engraved on the colored transparent plate 2206B in the chance display device 2206 are turned on or off can be viewed through the viewing window 2206A. In this way, the chance display device 2206 is formed in the introduction port same-view region that is visible at the same time when the introduction port 2201 is viewed.

  Further, the sorting blade 2202 is provided with a position sensor 2202S (see FIG. 115) similar to that of the pachinko machine 1A described above, and the position sensor 2202S is connected to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 is provided with a lamp lighting circuit for turning on / off the lamp in the chance display device 2206. The peripheral control board 4140 is connected to a lamp in the chance display device 2206, and the lamp of the chance display device 2206 can be turned on / off by a lamp lighting circuit. The peripheral control board 4140 turns on the lamp in the chance display device 2206 when a left position signal indicating that the sorting blade 2202 is located on the left side of the board is transmitted from the position sensor 2202S. Further, when a right position signal indicating that the sorting blade 2202 is located on the right side of the board is transmitted from the position sensor 2202S, the lamp in the chance display device 2206 is turned off.

  Next, the mode of chance display in the pachinko machine 1B1 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1B1, similarly to the pachinko machine 1A described above, the peripheral control board 4140 controls the sorting blade 2202 to be in the first guiding path guiding state and the second guiding path guiding state, thereby starting the game ball. The mouth guiding path is switched to the first starting port guiding path 2205A or the second starting port guiding path 2205B.

  Similarly to the pachinko machine 1A, the pachinko machine 1B1 can receive a lottery in which the lottery using the second special symbol is more advantageous than the lottery using the first special symbol. Therefore, the chance display is performed when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, and the chance display is not performed when the sorting blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state.

  In performing the chance display, the chance display device 2206 is used in the pachinko machine 1B1. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state, the position sensor 2202S (FIG. 115) provided on the sorting blade 2202 is used. The right position signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the right position signal, the lamp of the chance display device 2206 is turned off by the lamp lighting circuit. When the lamp of the chance display device 2206 is turned off, the character “CHANCE” engraved on the transparent plate 2206A becomes inconspicuous. For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current state is not at least a chance state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state, a left position signal is sent from the position sensor 2202S provided on the sorting blade 2202 to the peripheral control board 4140. Sent. In the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the left position signal, the lamp of the chance display device 2206 is lit by the lamp lighting circuit.

  When the lamp of the chance display device 2206 is turned on, the characters “CHANCE” engraved on the transparent plate 2206A are shining and become conspicuous. Thus, by making the characters “CHANCE” stand out, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current state is a chance state.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1B1, whether the lottery is performed in the low lottery or the high lottery is different between the case where the game ball passes the first start port 2001A and the case where the game ball passes the second start port 2001B. For this reason, the degree of advantage after the transition to the big hit gaming state changes depending on whether the game ball passes through the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B. For this reason, after the start opening guide path is switched by the distribution blade 2202, after the transition to the big hit gaming state by the first start opening guide path 2205 A or the second start opening guide path 2205 B, the guide path through which the game ball can pass Can be involved in the degree of advantage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to failure to participate in the degree of advantage after the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the introduction port 2201 passes through the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B, which is the trigger for the big hit lottery, the passage of the game ball through the introduction port 2201 is very large for the player. It becomes an object of interest. Therefore, the player often watches the introduction port 2201. Here, the chance display device 2206 is used for performing the chance display, and the chance display device 2206 is in the vicinity of the introduction port 2201, and the introduction port assimilation region at a position that enters the field of view when the introduction port 2201 is visually recognized. Is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1B1 includes the chance display device 2206 that can recognize that the high lottery opportunity has arrived in order to reduce the loss of the high lottery opportunity when the introduction port 2201 is visually recognized. For this reason, it is possible to recognize the opportunity of the high lottery at the same time by visually checking the chance display device 2206 when visually checking the passing of the game ball introduction port 2201 as a lottery opportunity. Therefore, since the player can know the opportunity to receive the high lottery, the loss of the opportunity to receive the lottery where the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game becomes large is suppressed, and consequently the game is continued. You can improve your feelings.

  In addition, when the special symbol changes during the normal gaming state and the off-line symbol is displayed, the player may be discouraged from continuing to play the game and stop the game as it is. . In this regard, the player is allowed to recognize that the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state and the chance display device 2206 recognizes that the chance display device 2206 has reached the opportunity for a high lottery. Motivated and increased the chance of continuing the game so that you can receive a high draw. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  Another aspect of the chance display device will be described. FIG. 134 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to yet another aspect, FIG. 135 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the modified second sorting unit 2400α, and (b) is a letter on the chance content display member. It is a figure which shows typically each performed side surface. Note that the chance content display member 2007B in the chance display device 2207 has four side surfaces, and since there is no description of characters or the like on one of the side surfaces, FIG. 135 (b ) Is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the pachinko machine 1B2 is provided with a modified second sorting unit 2400α. As shown in FIG. 135, the chance display device 2207 in the modified second distribution unit 2400α includes a chance display base member and a chance content display member 2207B in which a chance display window 2207A is formed. The chance display window 2207A is provided in the upper part of the introduction port 2201, and is disposed at a position that falls within the field of view when the introduction port 2201 is viewed. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the chance content display member 2207B has a prismatic shape, and various characters are shown on its side. Specifically, on the chance content display member 2207B, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), characters “NORMAL” are displayed on the first surface 2207B1, and characters “CHANCE” are displayed on the second surface 2207B2. In addition, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed on the third surface 2207B3. In addition, although a character etc. are not described on the 4th surface, a predetermined character etc. can also be described on this 4th surface.

  The chance display device 2207 includes a rotation drive mechanism (not shown), and supports the chance content display device 2207B so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis (not shown) penetrating the center points of the bottom surface and the top surface. The rotation drive device includes the above-described rotation shaft and a stepping motor that rotates the chance content display member 2207B around the rotation shaft. The peripheral control board 4140 operates the stepping motor on the basis of a position signal (left position signal or right position signal) transmitted from the position sensor 2202S (see FIG. 115) in the sorting blade 2202, etc. The display member 2207B is controlled to rotate. In addition, the peripheral control board 4140 rarely controls the rotation of the chance content display member 2207B based on the result of the big hit lottery based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  Any one of the first surface 2207B1 to the third surface 2207B3 of the chance content display member 2207B is visible from the front side of the game board 5 through the chance display window 2207A. Further, by rotating the chance content display member 2207B by the stepping motor, the surface that can be viewed from the front side of the game board 5 through the chance display window 2207A is any one of the first surface 2207B1 to the third surface 2207B3. It can be changed.

  Next, a mode of chance display using the chance display device 2207 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1B2 provided with the chance display device 2207, similarly to the pachinko machine 1A, the distribution blade 2202 is guided by the peripheral control board 4140 to the first guide path guidance state and the second guide path guidance, similarly to the pachinko machine 1A. The starting port guiding path through which the game ball is guided is switched to the first starting port guiding path 2205A or the second starting port guiding path 2205B.

  Similarly to the pachinko machine 1A, the pachinko machine 1B2 can receive a lottery in which the lottery using the second special symbol is more advantageous than the lottery using the first special symbol. For this reason, a chance display is performed when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state. On the other hand, no chance display is performed when the sorting blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state.

  As a case where the chance display by the chance display device 2207 is not performed, as shown in FIG. 136 (a), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state, the chance content display member is displayed from the chance display window 2207A. The chance content display member 2207B is rotated so as to display the first surface 2207B1 of 2207B. In this case, the character “NORMAL” drawn on the first surface 2207B1 of the chance content display member 2207B is visible from the chance display window 2207A. For this reason, it is possible to make the player recognize that the present state is not in a chance state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state, the chance content is displayed so that the second surface 2207B2 of the chance content display member 2207B is displayed from the chance display window 2207A. The display member 2207B is rotated. In this case, the characters “CHANCE” drawn on the second surface 2207B2 of the chance content display member 2207B are visible from the chance display window 2207A. By making the characters “CHANCE” visible as described above, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current state is a chance state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1B2, whether the lottery is performed in the low lottery or the high lottery is different between the case where the game ball passes the first start port 2001A and the case where the game ball passes the second start port 2001B. For this reason, the degree of advantage after the transition to the big hit gaming state changes depending on whether the game ball passes through the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B. For this reason, after the start opening flow path is switched by the distribution blade 2202, the flow path through which the game ball can pass is changed to the big hit gaming state by the first start opening guide path 2205 A or the second start opening guide path 2205 B. Can be involved in the degree of advantage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to failure to participate in the degree of advantage after the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the introduction port 2201 passes through the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B, which is the trigger for the big hit lottery, the passage of the game ball through the introduction port 2201 is very large for the player. It becomes an object of interest. Therefore, the player often watches the introduction port 2201. Here, the chance display device 2207 is used to perform the chance display, and the chance display device 2207 is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 2201 and enters the field of view when the introduction port 2201 is visually recognized. . As described above, the pachinko machine 1B2 includes the chance display device 2207 that can recognize that the high lottery opportunity has arrived in order to reduce the loss of the high lottery opportunity when the introduction port 2201 is visually recognized. For this reason, by visually recognizing the passage of the game ball introduction port 2201 serving as a lottery opportunity, it is possible to simultaneously recognize the opportunity of the high lottery. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a loss of opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  In addition, when the special symbol changes during the normal gaming state and the off-line symbol is displayed, the player may be discouraged from continuing to play the game and stop the game as it is. . In this regard, the player is allowed to recognize that the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state and the chance display device 2207 recognizes that the chance display device 2207 has received a high lottery opportunity. Motivated and increased the chance of continuing the game so that you can receive a high draw. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  In addition, the letters “Intense heat” are displayed on the third surface 2207B3 of the chance content display member 2207B. In most cases, the peripheral control board 4140 rotates the chance content display member 2207B by rotating the first surface 2207B1 as described above based on the position signal transmitted from the position sensor 2202S in the sorting blade 2202. Control to display or display the second surface 2207B2.

  In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit or a loss, the peripheral control board 4140 executes control to display the third surface 2207B3 of the chance content display member 2207B very rarely. The ratio of displaying the third surface 2207B3 of the chance content display member 2207B when the result of the big win lottery is a ratio of displaying the third surface 2207B3 of the chance content display member 2207B when the result of the big hit lottery is off Is set to about 4 times. For this reason, the expectation for the big hit can be greatly increased by displaying the third surface 2207B3 of the chance content display member 2207B.

  In most cases, the chance content display member 2207B displays the first surface 2207B1 or the second surface 2207B2 so as to notify the start port where the next game ball enters. On the other hand, in the chance content display member 2207B as described above, the third surface 2207B3 is displayed to suggest the result of the big hit lottery, thereby diversifying the production for suggesting the result of the big hit lottery. be able to. In particular, as an effect suggested by the result of the big hit lottery, the game content ball that next enters the introduction port 2201 at the normal time uses a chance content display member 2207B that informs whether or not to enter the introduction port 2201 in the chance state. Thus, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness and to improve the interest based on the unexpectedness.

  Further, for example, in a case where a plurality of game balls enter the first starting port 2001A to shift from the non-chance state to the chance state, the characters “NEXT” can be represented on the fourth surface. In this case, for example, the fourth screen can be displayed on the chance display device 2207 in a state in which a transition is made to the chance state when one more game ball enters the first start port 2001A. By this display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the chance state is approaching.

  Further, instead of the chance display device 2207 as described above, a mechanical chance display device including an opening / closing door may be used. This mechanical chance device is provided with a viewing window similar to the above-described chance display window 2207A, and an opening / closing door is provided on this viewing window. On the back side of the chance window, a dial with the letters “CHANCE” is fixedly installed. By opening the door, “CHANCE” can be seen from the front side and the door is closed. “CHANCE” becomes invisible from the surface side.

  The open / close door can be opened and closed by an actuator, and this actuator is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 (FIG. 115). Further, the peripheral control board 4140 controls the actuator based on the position signal transmitted from the position sensor 2202S in the sorting blade 2202. Specifically, when a left position signal is transmitted from the position sensor 2202S, the actuator is controlled in a direction in which the door is closed. Further, when a right position signal is transmitted from the position sensor 2202S, the actuator is controlled in a direction in which the door is opened. Thus, in a non-chance state in which the game balls that have entered the introduction port 2201 are distributed to the first start-out guide path 2205A, the opening / closing door closes and the characters “CHANCE” become invisible, and there is no chance state. Can be recognized by the player. On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the introduction port 2201 is in a chance state in which the game ball is distributed to the second start port guide path 2205B, the opening / closing door is opened and the characters “CHANCE” can be visually recognized. A player can be made aware of something. Instead of the peripheral control board 4140, another control board, for example, a control board for an opening / closing door can be used.

  As described above, the open / close door can be controlled by a control device such as the peripheral control board 4140 using an actuator, but can be opened and closed in another manner. For example, the open / close door and the sorting blade 2202 can be mechanically connected via an intermediary mechanism such as a link mechanism or a gear mechanism. The intermediary mechanism may be a mechanism in which the opening / closing door is closed when the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state and the opening / closing door is opened when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state. it can. By using such a mechanical intermediary mechanism, it is possible to open and close the open / close door even when a disconnection or the like occurs. In addition, since the opening / closing door can be opened and closed in accordance with the swing of the sorting blade 2202, it is possible to make it easier for the player to realize the start of the chance state.

  Furthermore, instead of the chance content display member 2007B in the chance display device 2207, a dial on which characters such as “CHANCE” and “NORMAL” are respectively slid or moved in another manner. It is also possible to make the display from the chance display window 2207A.

  Subsequently, another aspect of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 137 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to still another embodiment. The pachinko machine 1C according to the present embodiment is mainly different from the pachinko machine 1A in the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, the display control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is also different in relation to the difference in the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the pachinko machine 1C according to this aspect includes a first sorting unit 2200. The first distribution unit 2200 has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1A, and includes an introduction port 2201, a distribution blade 2202, a first start port 2001A, and a second start port 2001B. In addition, a case member 2003 is provided, and a first start port guide path 2205A for guiding a game ball from the introduction port 2201 to the first start port 2001A and a second start port 2001B from the introduction port 2201 are provided inside the case member 2203. A second starting port guide path 2205B for guiding the game ball is formed. Further, a transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is attached to the surface of the case member 2203.

  Further, in the first distribution unit 2200, the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is used for a predetermined effect or the like, and the case member 2203 can be directly visually recognized when viewed from the player side through the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204. It is said that. For this reason, the introduction flow path 2200A, the first start port guide path 2205A, the second start port guide path 2205B, and the like formed inside the case member 2203 are easily visible from the player side. Furthermore, the sorting blade 2202, the first starting port 2001A, the second starting port 2001B, and the like are also easily visible from the player side. However, it is also possible to display an image on the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 in the same manner as the pachinko machine 1A.

  Further, the distribution blade 2202 in the pachinko machine 1C is provided with a position sensor 2202S (FIG. 115). When the distribution blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state, the right position signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. When the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, a left position signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the position signal transmitted from the position sensor 2202S performs the chance display DB on the chance display area DBA in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400 shown in FIG. 136 based on the received position signal. The display mode is controlled. The chance display is performed by displaying a decoration character “CHANCE”. Due to this chance display effect, an arrival effect that can recognize the arrival of the high lottery is executed to reduce the loss of the opportunity for the high lottery.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 displays decorative symbols DL, DC, and DR according to the result of the big hit lottery. The decorative symbols DL, DC, DR start when triggered by a game ball entering the first start port 2001A, the second start port 2001B, and the third start port 2005c. For example, a predetermined jackpot symbol combination, for example, a combination of three similar numbers is displayed. Further, when the jackpot lottery is not won, for example, symbol combinations other than the jackpot symbol combination are displayed.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs a hold display indicating the number of times the special symbol has changed. In FIG. 126, first reserved symbols H11 to H14 indicating the number of reserved special symbols 1 are displayed, and second reserved symbols H21 to H24 indicating the number of reserved special symbols 2 are displayed. The display number of the first reserved symbols H11 to H14 indicates the special symbol 1 reserved number, and the display number of the second reserved symbols H21 to H24 indicates the special symbol 2 reserved number. In addition, the first reserved illustrations H11 to H14 are displayed as circles, and the second reserved symbols H21 to H24 are displayed as rectangles. For this reason, H11-H14 and the 2nd reservation symbols H21-H24 are distinguished and displayed. The first reserved symbols H11 to H14 and the second reserved symbols H21 to H24 are displayed in different shapes, but may be displayed as a common shape. Or it is also possible to distinguish and display the first reserved symbols H11 to H14 and the second reserved symbols H21 to H24 by displaying them in different colors, patterns, etc., though they have a common shape.

  The first reserved symbols H11 to H14 and the second reserved symbols H21 to H24 are displayed in the order in which game balls have entered the first start port 2001A and the third start port 2005c or the second start port 2001B. In addition, during the normal game state, there is almost no game ball entering the third start opening 2005c, and the game ball introduced into the introduction opening 2201 is connected to the first start opening guide path 2205A and the second start opening 2202A by the distribution blade 2202. Since it is distributed to the two start opening guide paths 2205B, the game balls alternately enter the first start opening 2001A and the second start opening 2001B. For this reason, during the normal gaming state, in most cases, the first reserved symbols H11 to H14 and the second reserved symbols H21 to H24 are displayed alternately. However, the display mode and display order of the reserved symbols are not limited to this mode and can be various display modes. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays various effects that excite the game as the game progresses.

  Next, the mode of chance display in the pachinko machine 1C will be described. In the pachinko machine 1C, similarly to the above pachinko machine 1A, the peripheral blades 2202 are controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 to the first guiding path guiding state and the second guiding path guiding state, and the game ball is guided. The mouth guiding path is switched to the first starting port guiding path 2205A or the second starting port guiding path 2205B.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1C, as in the case of the pachinko machine 1A, the lottery with the second special symbol is more advantageous than the lottery with the first special symbol. For this reason, when the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, the chance display DB to the chance display area DBA in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed, and the distribution blade 2202 is in the first taxiway guidance state. Is not performed in the chance display area DBA of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  The chance display using the liquid crystal display device 1400 is specifically performed as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state, a right position signal is received from a position sensor 2202S (see FIG. 115) provided on the sorting blade 2202. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the right position signal does not perform the chance display DB in the chance display area DBA in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400. By not performing the chance display in such a chance area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current state is not at least a chance state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state, a left position signal is sent to the peripheral control board 4140 from the position sensor 2202 S provided on the sorting blade 2202. Sent. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the left position signal performs a chance display DB on the chance display area DBA in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400. By performing the chance display DB in the chance display area DBA in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player can recognize that the present is in the chance state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1C, whether the lottery is performed in the low lottery or the high lottery is different between the case where the game ball passes the first start port 2001A and the case where the game ball passes the second start port 2001B. For this reason, the degree of advantage after the transition to the big hit gaming state changes depending on whether the game ball passes through the first start port 2001A or the second start port 2001B. For this reason, after the start opening flow path is switched by the distribution blade 2202, the flow path through which the game ball can pass is changed to the big hit gaming state by the first start opening guide path 2205 A or the second start opening guide path 2205 B. Can be involved in the degree of advantage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to failure to participate in the degree of advantage after the transition to the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, since the liquid crystal display device 1400 executes a symbol combination indicating the result of the big hit lottery, an effect for exciting the game, etc., the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is of great interest to the player. . Therefore, the player often watches the liquid crystal display device 1400. Here, in performing the chance display, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is used in which the player has more opportunities to watch. In the pachinko machine 1C, a chance display DB capable of recognizing that a high lottery opportunity has arrived in order to reduce a loss of the high lottery opportunity can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  In addition, when the special symbol changes during the normal gaming state and the off-line symbol is displayed, the player may be discouraged from continuing to play the game and stop the game as it is. . In this regard, the player is allowed to recognize that the distribution blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state and the chance display device 2206 recognizes that the chance display device 2206 has reached the opportunity for a high lottery. Motivated and increased the chance of continuing the game so that you can receive a high draw. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the opportunity to receive a lottery that increases the degree of advantage that should be obtained by continuing the game, and to improve the feeling of continuing the game.

  In the above example, the chance display area DBA is formed in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and whether to display the chance display in the chance display area DBA is selected. It can also be. For example, a non-chance display in which a decorative character “NORMAL” is displayed at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a chance display of a decorative character “CHANCE” in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are displayed. Can do.

  In the case of this example, for example, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the first guiding path guiding state, the position sensor 2202S (FIG. 115) provided on the sorting blade 2202 is used. The right position signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the right position signal performs a control of brightly displaying the non-chance display DB1 in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and darkly displaying the chance display DB2 in the lower right corner.

  Note that the bright display is a display in which a target region is brightly displayed, and is a display that is easy for a player or the like who visually recognizes the liquid crystal display device 1400 to view. On the other hand, the dark display is a display in which a target region is darkly displayed and is in a state in which it is difficult for a player or the like who views the liquid crystal display device 1400 to see. In this way, the non-chance display DB1 is brightly displayed and the chance display DB2 is darkly displayed, so that the non-chance display DB1 is emphasized, so that the player can recognize that at least the present is not in the chance state. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (b), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state, a left position signal is sent from the position sensor 2202S provided on the sorting blade 2202 to the peripheral control board 4140. Sent. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the left position signal performs control to darkly display the non-chance display DB1 in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and to brightly display the chance display DB2 in the lower right corner. In this way, by darkly displaying the non-chance display DB1 and brightly displaying the chance display DB2, the chance display DB2 is emphasized, so that the player can recognize that the present is in the chance state. .

  By performing the display in the liquid crystal display device according to this aspect, the chance display is displayed or not displayed in the above example, whereas the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a non-chance of the decorative character “NORMAL”. The display DB 1 and the chance display DB 2 of the decorative character “CHANCE” are displayed at the same time. For this reason, by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device 1400, it can be recognized that there is a state where there is a chance and a state where there is no chance.

  Further, as other display modes, for example, a non-chance display of a dark face character (hereinafter referred to as “non-chance character”) in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a bright face character in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It may be a chance display (hereinafter referred to as “chance character”).

  For example, by changing the character's facial expression, the display in the display area can be changed from non-chance display to chance display, or vice versa. It is also possible to display a character in a certain display area and perform chance display and non-chance display by changing the character. Or when changing a display, it can also display by a character etc. instead of a character. Further, when the chance display and the non-chance display are performed by changing the color, the pattern, etc., the chance display and the non-chance display can be switched by changing the color, the pattern, or the like.

  Furthermore, the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit lottery can be suggested by the display mode of the chance character and the non-chance character. For example, the higher the degree of smile of the character displayed in the chance display DB 4, the higher the ratio of winning an advantageous big hit, for example, the big hit A. Alternatively, the non-chance display DB 3 and the chance display DB 4 that are brightly displayed can be used to produce an effect indicating the result of the big win lottery by displaying the enlarged display during or around the variation display of the decorative symbols DL, DC, DR. . In this case, an effect according to the relationship with the advantage level of the big hit gaming state can be performed, which can contribute to diversification of the effect.

  On the other hand, with respect to the non-chance display DB1, DB3 and chance display DB2, DB4 described above, the change display of the decorative symbols DL, DC, DR is finished and the guide vane guidance state of the sorting blade 2202 when these are stopped is displayed. Depending on the situation, it can be displayed brightly or darkly. For example, when the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols DL, DC, DR is finished and these are stopped and displayed, and the sorting blade 2202 is in the second taxiway guidance state, the non-chance DB1 and DB3 are darkly displayed. In addition, the chance display DB2 and DB4 can be displayed brightly.

  When the decorative symbols DL, DC, and DR are stopped and displayed, the player may or may not play a game. Here, if the decorative symbols DL, DC, and DR are stopped and displayed while the player is playing a game, the player enters the start port by entering the game ball into the introduction port 2201. There are many cases where a player wants to win a big hit lottery. Here, when it is in the chance state, the non-chance DB1 and DB3 are darkly displayed and the chance display DB2 and DB4 are brightly displayed, so that the next big hit lottery has a high expectation. Can make the big hit lottery.

  On the other hand, when the player is not playing a game, the decorative symbols DL, DC, and DR are often stopped and displayed. For example, when viewed from a game store, there is a desire to promote the operation of the game. Under these circumstances, when the player is in the chance state, the non-chance DB1 and DB3 are darkly displayed, and the chance display DB2 and DB4 are brightly displayed. It can be known that now is the chance to start the game of the pachinko machine 1C. Also, the player who started the game can first receive a big win lottery in a chance state.

  Further, in combination with the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 or instead of the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 (see FIG. 27) or a sub liquid crystal display device provided on the back side of the touch panel 246. The chance display can also be performed using other display devices such as the above. Here, an example of chance display using the upper liquid crystal display device 244 that can be visually recognized via the touch panel 246 will be described. In the following description, the touch panel 246 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 may be collectively referred to as “touch panel 246 etc.”.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 140A and 140B, a non-chance display SD1, a chance display SD2, and a change display SDC are displayed on the touch panel 246 and the like. The peripheral control board 4140 performs display control of the touch panel 246 and the like based on position information transmitted from the position sensor 2202S (FIG. 115) provided on the sorting blade 2202.

  Specifically, when the sorting blade 2202 (see FIG. 112 and the like) is in the first guiding path guiding state, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the position sensor 2202S (see FIG. The right position signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the right position signal, the non-chance display SD1 on the touch panel 246 or the like is displayed brightly, and the chance display SD2 is displayed darkly. By performing such a display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current state is not at least a chance state.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (b), when the sorting blade 2202 is in the second guiding path guiding state, a left position signal is sent from the position sensor 2202S provided on the sorting blade 2202 to the peripheral control board 4140. Sent. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the left position signal darkly displays the non-chance display SD1 on the touch panel 246 and the like and brightly displays the chance display SD2. With the display on the touch panel 246 and the like, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current state is a chance state.

  Further, when the player or the like touches the change display SDC on the touch panel 246 or the like, the display on the touch panel 246 or the like can be changed. Specifically, the non-chance display SD1 and the chance display SD2 can be prevented from being displayed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the chance display from being performed for the player who wants to enjoy whether the player is in the chance state or not, and can meet the diverse needs of the player. Further, the change display SDC can remain displayed even after the display on the touch panel 246 or the like is changed. In this case, the non-chance display SD1 and the chance display SD2 are displayed by touching the touch panel 246 or the like.

  By performing the display on the touch panel 246 or the like according to this aspect, it is easier to perform the chance display separately from the effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400, compared to the case where the chance display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as in the above example. It becomes. In addition, display specialized for chance display can also be performed. Furthermore, since an area for performing chance display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 becomes unnecessary, a wide display area for effects in the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be secured.

  As other chance display modes, the chance display device can be provided in a portion other than the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204, the chance display device 2207, the liquid crystal display device 1400, the touch panel 246, and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 141, a chance display device 2208 may be provided in the function display unit 6040 in the lower left part of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1D. Further, a chance display device 2209 may be provided at a substantially central position on the left side height direction of the game board 5.

  Further, the approximate center position in the left height direction of the game board 5 on which the chance display device 2209 is provided is an area that is rarely used for other effects. By providing the chance display device 2209 in such an area having a relatively low utility value, it is possible to effectively utilize the visually recognizable area of the game board 5. Furthermore, the position where the chance display device 2209 is provided is a portion where a falling game ball often passes and is a position where a player who follows the flow of the game ball often visually recognizes. In this manner, by providing the chance display device 2209 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the player's attention can be drawn and the chance display can be more easily recognized.

  In the above-mentioned first allocation unit, the required number of times of entering is displayed in the first non-chance image, but in other allocation units, the required number of times of entering is not displayed. A display device may be provided separately to display the required number of times of entry. As the arrival number display device, it can be provided at an arbitrary position, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be used, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 can be used, or the left side of 2300 in the game area 5a. An arrival number display device can be separately provided in an arbitrary area such as an area. As the arrival count display device at this time, a liquid crystal display device or the like can be used, or a display device such as a 7-segment display or a dot can be used.

  Furthermore, another example of the sorting apparatus will be described. 142 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the third sorting unit, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line bb, and FIG. 144 is the third sorting. It is a principal part disassembled perspective view of a unit. As shown in FIG. 142, the pachinko machine 1E of this example is provided with a third sorting unit 2500 shown in FIG. 142 in place of the sorting device 2200 shown in FIG. 111, as compared with the pachinko machine 1A. Is mainly different in that Hereinafter, the third sorting unit 2500 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the third sorting unit 2500 in the pachinko machine 1E is arranged at a position approximately at the center in the width direction of the game board 5 and slightly below the center in the height direction. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the third sorting unit 2500 includes a first starting port 2001 </ b> A, a second starting port 2001 </ b> B, and a sorting blade 2202, which are accommodated in a case member 2503. An inlet 2201 is formed at the upper end of the case member 2503.

  The case member 2503 includes a housing main body 2503A that houses the first starting port 2001A and the second starting port 2001B, and further the sorting blade 2202. In addition, a lower plate member 2503B extending downward is provided at the lower end of the housing main body 2503A. The extending portion 2503 has a plate shape, and the thickness thereof is substantially the same as the thickness of the surface plate in the housing main body 2503A of the case member 2503. For this reason, a space through which game balls can pass is formed on the back side of the lower plate member 2503B.

  The housing main body 2503A of the case member 2503 is formed so as to protrude toward the front side of the board surface, and an introduction flow path through which a game ball can pass above the distribution blade 2202 inside the housing main body 2503A. 2200A is formed. A blade drive motor 2202M is provided on the back side of the sorting blade 2202. A game ball that has entered from the introduction port 2201 flows into the introduction flow path 2200A. A transmissive liquid crystal display 2204 is attached to the surface of the housing main body 2503A.

  Further, a first start port guide path 2205A is formed on the inner side of the housing main body 2503A and below the distribution blade 2202, and on the right side below the distribution blade 2202 inside the housing main body 2503A. A second starting port guiding path 2205B is formed. A game ball can pass through each of the first start port guide path 2205A and the second start port guide path 2205B. The configuration of the introduction port 2201, the first start port 2001A, the second start port 2001B, the sorting blade 2202, the transmissive liquid crystal display 2204, the first start port guide path 2205A, and the second start port guide path 2205B is as described above. The configuration is the same as that of the first sorting unit 2202.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the lower plate member 2503B in the case member 2503 extends to a position covering a part of the out port 6006 arranged at the lower end of the game area 5a. Since a space through which a game ball can pass is formed on the back side of the lower plate member 2503B, the game area is driven into the game area 5a without entering the introduction port 2201, the general winning port 2004, or the like. The game ball that has reached the lower end of 5a is received in the out port 6006.

  The pachinko machine 1E provided with the third sorting unit 2500 has the same effects as the pachinko machine 1A described above. In addition, the function and effect obtained by providing the third sorting unit 2500 will be described. A part of the game balls launched into the game area 5a win the start ports 2001A and 2001B through the introduction port 2201 or win the general prize port 2004, but other game balls are game regions. Since it reaches the lowermost end of 5a and is received by the out port 6006, many game balls are received in the out port 6006.

  Here, if a magnetic body is arranged in the vicinity of the out port 6006, the game balls are attracted and moved by the magnetic force of the magnetic body, or a lot of game balls are retained around the out port 6006 to form a so-called “grape”. For example, it may be possible to illegally pay out game balls. For this reason, for example, a person who intends to act fraudulently may arrange a magnetic body around the out port 6006 from the outside of the pachinko machine 1E so as to attempt unauthorized payment.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1E, the lower plate member 2503B provided on the case member 2503 of the third sorting unit 2500 extends to a position that covers a part of the out port 6006. When viewed from the outside of 1E, the lower plate member 2503B of the case member 2503 is disposed on the front side of the out port 6006. For this reason, even if a magnetic body is disposed outside the out port 6006, the magnetic force of the magnetic body in the vicinity of the out port 6006 is weakened or erased by the lower plate member 2503B of the case member 2503. Therefore, when the magnetic body is arranged outside the pachinko machine 1E, the adsorption of the game ball by the magnetic body can be suppressed, and illegal payout of the game ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, a member for inhibiting the magnetic force due to the magnetic material is an extended portion 2503 provided on the case member 2503 in the third sorting unit 2500. Since the third sorting unit 2500 is used by being disposed at a position close to the out port 6006, the member disposed in the vicinity of the out port 6006 can suppress fraud around the out port 6006 using a magnetic material. Can contribute. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a shielding member that blocks special magnetism separately and fraud can be suppressed, an increase in the number of parts for fraud suppression can be suppressed.

  In the above example, the lower plate member 2503B of the case member 2503 is extended to a position that covers a part of the out port 6006. However, a similar extension portion is provided below other members, for example, the general winning port 2004. , And can be extended to a position covering a part of the out port 6006. Further, the surface of the lower plate member 2503B can be decorated to make it look like a decorative member. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who intends to commit fraud to understand that there is an effect of fraud suppression.

  Further, the lower plate member 2503B of the case member 2503 is made of, for example, a material common to the housing main body 2503A of the case member 2503, for example, plastic, but can be made of other materials. Further, a magnetic shield can be formed on the lower plate member 2503B. By forming a magnetic shield on the lower plate member 2503B, it is possible to further enhance the effect of fraud suppression by the magnetic material.

  Note that in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is the same as an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player. This is a kind of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 200 Dish unit 201 Upper plate (storage part)
210 Plate unit base 212 Upper plate body (reservoir)
212a Guidance passage section 220 Production operation unit 220A Mounting base unit 220B Touch unit 220C Button unit 244 Upper plate liquid crystal display device (image display device)
246 Touch Panel 257 Top Plate Production Button (Press Button)
260 Tray unit cover (bulging member)
261 Lower dish opening 262 Upper dish lower covering part
2001A 1st starting port 2001B 2nd starting port 2201 Introducing port 2202 Sorting blade 2203 Case member 2204 Transmission type liquid crystal display 2205A First starting port guiding path 2205B Second starting port guiding path

Claims (1)

A first flow path for guiding the game medium that has passed through the introduction port provided in the game area to the first passage opening and a second flow path for guiding the second medium to a second passage opening different from the first passage opening are formed, A first lot is provided with a lottery means for performing lottery by passing a game medium through the passage port or the second passage port, and a channel through which the game medium passing through the introduction port is guided is the first channel. A gaming machine comprising switching means for switching to a second guidance state in which the guidance state or the flow path is the second flow path,
The lottery means a lottery in which a lottery by passing the game medium through the second passage opening has a higher degree of advantage at the time of winning than a lottery by passing the game medium through the first passage opening. Yes,
The switching means switches the flow path when a plurality of game media pass through the first passage port or the second passage port.